JP2014136035A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance the performance effect of a game machine including a variable display portion for performing a variable display of a plurality of reels, on which a plurality of kinds of drawing patterns are displayed by the establishment of a prescribed condition, for performing a variable display game to give a predetermined game value in accordance with a symbol combination which is stopped on an effective line positioned to cross the front face portions of the reels.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a performance display device (an image display device 3) disposed near a variable display portion having a reel 6, for performing performance relating to a game; and performance control means (or a performance control device 70) for controlling the performance display device. Moreover, the performance display device is made movable between a position retracted from the front of the variable display portion and a position overlying the front of the variable display portion. The performance control means controls the moving action of the performance display device, and controls the operation so that an effective line is not overlapped at a position overlying the front of the variable display portion.

Description

  The present invention includes a variation display unit that performs variation display of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the symbol is stopped on an effective line positioned across the front portion of the plurality of reels. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value according to a combination.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a slot machine, there has been proposed one in which a movable member with a pattern appears on the front side of a plurality of variable display units (reels) capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner (for example, , See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-9863

  However, what appears in front of the reel is simply a movable member on which a picture is drawn, and it is not very changeable. It gets used to the game as it continues, and it cannot be said that the effect of production is so high.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a variable display unit for performing variable display of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to stop on an effective line positioned across the front surface of the plurality of reels. In a gaming machine that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value in accordance with the symbol combination that has been made, the effect is to be enhanced.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the invention described in claim 1 includes a variation display unit that performs variation display of a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes a front surface of the plurality of reels. In a gaming machine that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value in accordance with a symbol combination stopped on an active line located across the section,
An effect display device that is provided in the vicinity of the variable display unit and displays an effect related to a game,
Production control means for controlling the production display device,
The effect display device
It is configured to be movable between a position retracted from the front of the fluctuation display section and a position overlapping the front of the fluctuation display section,
The production control means includes
Controlling the movement operation of the effect display device,
The operation is controlled such that a symbol on the effective line is visible at a position overlapping the front of the variable display unit.

  Here, the effective line is a virtual line that connects the symbols that can be visually recognized by the player among the symbols of each reel for which the variable display is stopped.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and powerful effect by moving the effect display device, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Also, since the active line is not hidden, the game can be continued without interfering with the game.

  A second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the effective line is a horizontal line.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, since the effective line is a horizontal line, it is easy for the player to see. Further, it is easy to control the movement operation so as not to overlap the effective line.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the effect display device includes:
It is provided above the fluctuation display unit.

  According to invention of Claim 3, it is easy to visually recognize from a player.

  Invention of Claim 4 is a game machine as described in any one of Claim 1 to 3, Comprising: At least a front surface is transparent, The cover member which covers the movement range of the said production | presentation display apparatus is provided. And

  According to the invention described in claim 4, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the effect display device, and it is possible to prevent failure due to contact with the player.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the novel and powerful production which is not by the conventional by the production | presentation display apparatus moving can be performed, and the production effect can be heightened. Also, since the active line is not hidden, the game can be continued without interfering with the game.

It is a front view showing an appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the front frame of the slot machine. It is a front view of a fluctuation display device. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the control system of a slot machine. FIG. 3 is an arrangement diagram of symbols on a sheet arranged on an outer peripheral surface of a reel. It is a figure explaining the kind of winning a prize, a pattern combination aspect, and winning content. It is a figure which shows an example of a reach eye. It is a figure which shows an example of the outcome of a rare role. It is a figure which shows an internal lottery combination. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of a game state. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of the game state in a game control apparatus. It is a state transition diagram explaining the transition of the gaming state in the effect control device. It is a figure explaining the acquisition mode of AT right in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining game control processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an internal lottery process. It is a figure explaining the kind of winning winning determination table and the overlapping winning expectation degree of rare combination and bonus. It is a flowchart explaining a freeze production setting process. It is a figure explaining a freeze execution determination table. It is a flowchart explaining a reel rotation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the operation intervention freezing process. It is a flowchart explaining a reel rotation stop process. It is a figure explaining a continuous irregular operation counter value and invalid time. It is a flowchart explaining a winning determination process. It is a flowchart explaining game state update processing. It is a flowchart explaining an effect control process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a freeze production process. It is a flowchart explaining the operation intervention freeze effect process. It is a flowchart explaining a game effect determination process. It is a figure explaining a winning production | presentation determination table. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of production. It is a flowchart explaining a game progress control process. It is a flowchart explaining a bonus inside process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal / a precursor process. It is a flowchart explaining a normal / a precursor process. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of penalties freeze. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of penalties freeze. It is a flowchart explaining an AT waiting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during promotion / rush-in AT. It is a figure explaining an operation assistant image. It is a flowchart explaining a process during addition AT. It is a flowchart explaining the process in a special zone. It is a figure explaining the addition number determination table. It is a flowchart explaining the process during relief AT. It is a flowchart explaining a process during transfer chance. It is a flowchart explaining a stock acquisition determination process. It is a figure explaining AT stock expectation degree and special zone transition expectation degree. It is a flowchart explaining a stock lottery process. It is a figure explaining the stock determination table according to lottery probability state. It is a flowchart explaining stock processing during bonus. It is a flowchart explaining a BB1 stock process. It is a flowchart explaining a special zone transfer lottery process. It is a figure explaining the zone shift judgment table according to role. It is a flowchart explaining stock lottery mode transfer processing. It is a figure explaining mode promotion expectation. It is a flowchart explaining a continuous notice setting process. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of a continuous notice. It is a flowchart explaining AT precursor setting processing. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of a sign effect. It is a flowchart explaining a security monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a door opening corresponding | compatible process. It is a figure explaining the execution aspect of manual symbol alignment assistance. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of a door open monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation start process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the division | segmentation in the freeze time in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the long freeze process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation stop process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the division | segmentation aspect of the freeze effect in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the freeze production process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the long freeze process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of the freeze production in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution pattern of freeze production C in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the AT waiting process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the distributed freeze production in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the reel rotation stop process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop control process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop control process in a 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the automatic stop process during RT in the 3rd modification. It is a front view of the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the lower decoration device in a 2nd embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the inside of the lower decoration device in a 2nd embodiment from the side. It is a top view explaining operation | movement of the lower decoration apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the decoration picture of the decoration member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the image display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, and a decoration pattern. It is a block diagram which shows schematic structure of the control system in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the character selection process in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the inside of the slot machine in the 1st modification of a 2nd embodiment from the side. It is a side view explaining the arrangement | positioning aspect of the decoration member in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a side view explaining the arrangement | positioning aspect of the decoration member in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the change aspect of the decoration pattern in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the RTC process in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the change aspect of the decoration pattern in the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the suggestion display process in the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal freeze effect process in 3rd Embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the slot machine in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a side view of the slot machine in the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of an image display apparatus and a reel in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal freezing process in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal freeze production process in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the security monitoring process in the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus and lower decoration apparatus in the 5th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the slot machine in the 6th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the image display apparatus in the 6th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the display apparatus operation | movement process in the 6th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the slot machine in the 7th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the slot machine in the 7th modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the image data and display mode in the 7th modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the assist image generation process in the 7th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the slot machine in the 8th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 8th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 8th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 8th modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the image display apparatus in the 8th modification of 3rd Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 1a whose front is open, and a hinge 2a (FIG. 2) is provided on the front of the housing 1a. The front frame 2 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-open manner. At the upper part of the front frame 2, there are provided an image display device 3 for effecting display and information display according to the game, a speaker 4 for effecting sound, and the like. The image display device 3 is composed of a liquid crystal display panel, for example, and displays various information in addition to the effect display relating to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information display on the image display device 3 are controlled by the effect control device 70 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the image display device 3 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control device 70 serves as a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

  A movable effect device 8 is provided above the image display device 3. This movable effect device 8 can be converted into a state retracted above the image display device 3 and a state overlapping the front of the image display device 3, and produces a game effect by the operation. When the movable effect device 8 is retracted above the image display device 3, the movable effect device 8 is located behind the concealing member 8 a and is invisible to the player, and overlaps the front of the image display device 3. Visible from the player.

  A front panel 9 is arranged in the center portion of the front frame 2 so that the rear side cannot be visually recognized, and a decorative pattern or the like is drawn, and the rear side is visible in the center portion of the front panel 9 (for example, A (transparent) symbol display window 5 is formed. The front panel 9 may be constituted by a display device. In the state where no image is displayed on the symbol display window 5, the reel 6 is visible, and an image that produces a game mainly around the symbol display window 5 is displayed. indicate. In this case, it is also possible to display an image that produces a game on the symbol display window 5.

  Through the symbol display window 5 (window portion), the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner by the rotation of the reel 6 disposed in the housing 1a can be visually recognized. The reel 6 includes a cylindrical left reel 6a, a middle reel 6b, and a right reel 6c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 6a, 6b, and 6c according to a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet 6d on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction ( (See FIG. 5). Each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is provided with a reel motor 64a, 64b, 64c (see FIG. 4), which is a stepping motor, and each reel 6a, 6b, 6c is independently driven for rotation. The rotation can be stopped. That is, the reel motors 64a, 64b, 64c serve as an electrical drive source for driving the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

  By rotating the reel 6 by the reel motor 64, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 5 are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 6 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are displayed through the symbol display window 5 for each reel 6a, 6b, 6c. And is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 5, the effective display portions of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized. That is, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c form a plurality of variable display units that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner.

  A predetermined enabling line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. In this embodiment, a line (middle line) crossing the middle symbols of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c and a line (middle line) obliquely crossing the reels 6a, 6b, 6c from the lower stage of the left reel 6a-the middle stage of the middle reel 6b-the upper stage of the right reel 6c ( A line (lower right line) that obliquely crosses each reel 6a, 6b, 6c from the upper stage of the left reel 6a to the middle stage of the left reel 6a to the lower stage of the right reel 6c is a line that can be activated. Then, when the number of bets (the number of bets) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) by the insertion of medals by the player or input from credits (hereinafter referred to as “betting operation”), the enabling line is activated (so-called Whether or not a winning combination (combination) is established is determined based on the symbol combination form (out) on the effective line.

  When winning is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are arranged on another line in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are arranged on the effective line. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbols of each reel 6a, 6b, 6c. It should be noted that the lines crossing the lower symbols of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c (lower lines) and the front portions (visible portions) facing the symbol display windows 5 of the reels 6a, 6b, 6c other than the above are crossed. It is also possible to arrange the appearance symbols on the virtual lines that are positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, right-up, and right-down lines), the lines that can be arranged in the appearance when winning the prize (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together. Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are enabled, and a predetermined enable line is enabled according to the number of bets. Based on the symbol combination form formed on the enable line It may be determined whether a winning (role) is established or not. For example, in the case of 1 bet, the middle line is the effective line, in the case of 2 bets, the upper and lower lines are active lines in addition to the middle line, and in the case of 3 bets, the upper right, lower and lower lines are valid lines. And Also, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2). In addition, the bet number may be arbitrarily set within a range of 1 to 3 instead of dedicated to 3 cards. In this case, however, an internal lottery described later is performed so that the internal winning probability that is most advantageous to the player when the number of bets is 3 in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, a backlight 111 that irradiates light from the rear of the reel at a position on the back side of the reel 6 and behind each symbol stop position in the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 5. (See FIG. 4). The reel 6 can transmit light, and it is possible to produce effects by light by changing the light irradiation mode by the backlight 111.

  Below the symbol display window 5, a credit number display unit 11, a game progress display unit 12, and a payout number display unit 13 are provided. The credit number display unit 11 displays the number of medals stored as credits without being paid out by the medal payout device 63 (see FIG. 4). The game progress display unit 12 displays a game progress state. Further, the payout number display unit 13 displays the number of payouts at the time of winning. These display parts 11, 12, and 13 are comprised by LED of 7 segments, for example, and display various information by the lighting state.

  On the lower right side of the symbol display window 5, there is provided a game state display unit 18 for displaying a state such as a replay state, a wait state, and a game standby state, and the game state is displayed by lighting the lamp. Also, on the lower left side of the symbol display window 5, a bet number display unit 19 for displaying the bet number is provided.

  The game state display unit 18 includes a replay display unit that indicates that a replay winning (replay winning) has been established and a replay game has been awarded, and until the reel 6 rotates after the player operates the start lever 21. A weight display section indicating that there is a waiting time (a state in which the reel 6 is waiting to start rotating because a certain time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game), and a standby in which the slot machine 1 can play a game It is composed of an insert medal display section that indicates a state and prompts a betting operation.

  A step portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 5, and the upper surface of the step portion is an inclined base portion 14 that is inclined downward on the front side. The tilting base portion 14 includes operation means including a medal insertion slot 15, a max bet button 17 as a progress operation portion for advancing the game, and an operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. An effect button 10 is provided.

  The medal slot 15 is disposed on the right side (the open end side of the front frame 2) when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1 in the inclined base part 14. When the player inserts a medal into the medal slot 15 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. A medal insertion detection switch 51 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the passage of medals is provided in a path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 pass. And the number of inserted medals is counted.

  The max bet button 17 is disposed on the left side of the inclined base portion 14 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1. The maximum bet button 17 can input from the credit to the upper limit number (for example, three) of the bet number by performing a pressing operation once. However, when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like that. The effect button 10 is arranged at the center of the tilting base part 14, and when the player operates, an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the effect display on the image display device 3 is performed, or the game History information is displayed.

  A payout button 20, a start lever 21, a return button 22, a reel stop button 24, a keyhole 23, and the like are provided below the inclined base portion 14. The payout button 20 is a medal inserted from the medal slot 15, a medal input as a bet number by the max bet button 17 (a bet medal), or a medal that is paid out when a winning is established (stored as a credit). This is used when giving a command to return the medal to the tray 27. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 after an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a re-game winning (replay winning), or a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, a flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) It is returned to the tray 27 via 68.

  The start lever 21 is an operation lever for making a progress operation unit for advancing the game and for starting a single game. The keyhole 23 is for inserting a key when opening the front frame 2 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 1. The return button 22 is used when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 15 and clogged by the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68 is returned to the tray 27.

  The reel stop button 24 forms a progress operation unit for advancing the game, and is provided with a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, a left reel stop button 24a, a middle reel 6c, which are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each other. The reel stop button 24b and the right reel stop button 24c are configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 6a, 6b, 6c in accordance with the stop operation. These reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c are formed of, for example, a colored translucent resin member. Inside the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, there is a stop button for informing whether or not the corresponding reel 6 can be stopped by operating the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c. Each LED 66 (see FIG. 4) is provided. That is, the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c perform a stop operation provided corresponding to each variation display unit, so that a plurality of stop operation units are formed, and the stop button LED 66 can cause the stop operation unit to emit light. It serves as an operation unit light emitting means.

  Further, a decorative plate (decorative panel) 25 that constitutes a lower region of the front frame 2 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, an ashtray 26, a receiving tray 27 for storing medals, a medal payout port 28, a speaker 4 for outputting sound, and the like are provided below the decorative plate 25 and at the lowermost portion of the front frame 2. .

  As shown in FIG. 2, a game control device 50 for controlling the slot machine 1 as a whole is disposed in the upper part inside the housing 1a. In addition, a reel mounting portion 29 is provided substantially at the center inside the housing 1a. On the reel mounting portion 29, the variable display device 100 having rotatable reels 6a, 6b, and 6c is mounted. ing. Further, an external signal output terminal 33 for outputting a signal from the game control device 50 to an external device is provided on the right side of the variation display device 100 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 1.

  Further, a door open / close detection switch 62 for detecting the open / close state of the front frame 2 and an upper lock mechanism 34 are provided on the right side of the game control device 50, and the front frame 2 is provided on the left side of the game control device 50. A hinge 2a is provided as a rotating shaft. Opening cover members 37a and 37b that cover the gripping openings respectively provided on both side walls of the housing 1a are provided immediately below both side portions of the reel mounting portion 29, and a front frame is provided in the vicinity of the opening cover member 37b. 2 is provided with a weight support portion 38 for receiving the weight when closed.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 63 is disposed in the lower part inside the housing 1a. The medal payout device 63 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 15 and guided by the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68, and a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line to establish a prize. In this case, the number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the winning or the medal that exceeds the upper limit of the credit by the addition associated with the winning is received to the tray 27. The medal for the credit is paid out to the tray 27 by the medal payout device 63 by operating the payout button 20. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 63, the medal that overflows and flows in from the medal payout device 63 is stored, or the medal collecting mechanism on the installation island where the slot machine 1 is installed. An overflow tank 30 is provided for guiding to the vehicle.

  Further, on the left side of the medal payout device 63, the power supply device 40 that supplies power to electronic components such as a control device, a motor, and a lamp, and the winning probability of the slot machine 1 are set to any one of six stages, for example. A setting device 60 is provided. A power switch 31 or the like is provided at a portion between the setting device 60 and the reels 6a, 6b, 6c.

  FIG. 3 shows the variable display device 100. The variable display device 100 includes a reel base member 101 fixed to the casing 1a and the reel mounting portion 29, a light emitting base member 110 attached to the reel base member 101, and a reel unit attached to the light emitting base member 110. 103. The reel base member 101 has a rectangular box shape having a concave chamber-shaped space 102 whose front surface is open. In the concave chamber-shaped space 102, a light emitting base member 110, a reel 6, a reel motor 64, and the like are provided. The reel unit 103 is arranged.

  The light emitting base member 110 is disposed so as to extend to the left and right in the concave chamber-shaped space 102 of the reel base member 101, and is fixed to the inner side surface of the reel base member 101. On the front surface of the light emitting base member 110, there is a backlight 111 that illuminates the reel 6 from the rear (inner circumference side), a winning line light emitting unit 112 that indicates the established winning, and a positioning unit 113 for manually aligning the symbols of the reel 6. Is provided. 3A shows a state where the backlight 111 and the winning line light emitting unit 112 are all turned off, and FIG. 3B shows a state where all the backlight 111 and the winning line light emitting unit 112 are turned on. ing.

  The reel unit 103 includes a left reel unit 103a, a middle reel unit 103b, and a right reel unit 103c arranged side by side. The driving mechanism such as the reel motor 64 of each reel unit 103 is supported by the light emitting base member 110, and the reel 6 rotates with respect to the light emitting base member 110.

  The backlight 111 provided on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 is a position overlapping the front and rear facing the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical reel 6, and the symbol display window 5 in the reel 6 that has stopped changing (rotating). Are arranged at positions corresponding to the front and rear of the symbol (effective display portion) that can be visually recognized. That is, for each reel 6, three backlights 111 are arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the three symbols that can be visually recognized by the reel 6, and a total of nine backlights 111 are disposed.

  Each backlight 111 includes a rectangular box-shaped enclosure portion 111a having a recessed chamber-shaped space that opens to the front, and a light emitter 111b (LED or lamp) is disposed inside the recessed chamber-shaped space of the enclosed portion 111a. Has been. The opening in front of the surrounding portion 111a has a size corresponding to one symbol (one frame) of the reel 6, and this opening is arranged so as to overlap the symbol of the reel 6 in which the fluctuation is stopped. Further, the light from the light emitter 111b is prevented from diffusing around by the surrounding portion 111a. Thereby, as shown in FIG.3 (b), each backlight 111 can illuminate the symbol to which it respond | corresponds independently. The backlight 111 illuminates the symbol corresponding to the winning, or suggests the result of the internal lottery by the light emission mode.

  The winning line light emitting unit 112 is a linear light emitting unit, and a portion that overlaps the reel 6 in the front-rear direction along the enabling line (middle stage, right-up and right-down line) among the symbol stop lines (symbol alignment lines). Except for this, it is provided between the left and right reels 6 a and 6 c and the reel base member 101 and between the adjacent reels 6. The winning line light emitting unit 112 is visible from the symbol display window 5 and notifies the winning by causing the winning line light emitting unit 112 to emit light along the symbol stop line in which symbols corresponding to the established winnings are aligned. . That is, the winning line light emitting unit 112 forms a line light emitting unit provided along a symbol stop line set so as to cross the front surface facing the windows (symbol display windows 5) of the plurality of reels 6.

  As will be described later, when the front frame 2 is opened, the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 along the predetermined symbol stop line are caused to emit light, and the store clerk of the game store manually rotates the reel 6. And has a function of performing auxiliary display for aligning the symbols. This predetermined symbol stop line can be changed by switching the light emission line setting switch 112a.

  For example, when the store clerk of the amusement store manually rotates the reel 6 and arranges a specific symbol (here, “7”) on the symbol stop line, the positioning unit 113 opens the store. This is to facilitate the alignment of the symbols. Then, by aligning the reference portion 6e (see FIG. 5) provided on the reel 6 with the positioning portion 113, a specific symbol is aligned with the symbol stop line (here, the middle line).

  The positioning portion 113 includes a positioning line 113 a displayed on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and a positioning display portion 113 b displayed on the left side of the reel base member 101. The positioning line 113a is displayed between the left and right reels 6a and 6c and the reel base member 101. Thus, by displaying the positioning line 113a at a position close to the left and right reels 6a and 6c, the reference portions 6e of the left and right reels 6a and 6c can be easily aligned. For the middle reel 6b, the positioning line 113a is not displayed at a close position. However, the reference portion 6e is aligned with reference to the left and right positioning lines 113a, or the left and right reels 6a, 6c already aligned with the positioning portion 113 are used. By aligning the reference portion 6e of the middle reel 6b with the reference portion 6e, the positioning can be easily performed.

  Further, the positioning display portion 113b is a display that indicates the position where the reference portion 6e is aligned in the same manner as the positioning line 113a. Here, the position is indicated by the apex of a triangle. It is also possible to position the reel 6 by aligning the reference portion 6e with the positioning display portion 113b. In addition, by using together with the positioning line 113a, the positioning line 113a and the winning line light emitting unit 112 can be easily distinguished from each other. The positioning display portion 113b displays “seam matching portion” as a display indicating a position where the reference portion 6e is to be aligned.

  The positioning display portion 113b is visible from the front when the front frame 2 is opened, but is blocked by the front panel 9 and cannot be viewed from the front when the front frame 2 is closed. That is, the front panel 9 (specifically, a decorative region around the symbol display window 5) serves as a shielding part that restricts rearward visual recognition. Thereby, it can prevent that a display is visible from a player, and does not spoil the beauty of the circumference of the symbol display window 5.

  In the present embodiment, the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 is a seam of the sheet 6d on which the pattern wound around the outer peripheral surface of the reel 6 is drawn. Thus, by using the joint of the sheet 6d as the reference portion 6e, it is not necessary to newly provide a separate reference portion 6e. “7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the frame that is directly above the joint of the sheet (see FIG. 5). By aligning the reference portion 6e provided on the reel 6 with the positioning portion 113, a specific symbol is displayed. The symbol (here, “7”) is aligned with the symbol stop line (here, the middle line).

  That is, the manual operation assisting means for assisting manual operation (manual symbol aligning assist) in which the positioning unit 113 and the reference unit 6e rotate the plurality of reels 6 so that a specific symbol is arranged on the symbol stop line. Make. As a result, it is possible to assist manual operation for setting a specific symbol on the symbol stop line with a simple structure. Note that the positioning unit 113 is not limited to the display as described above as long as it is a standard for matching the reference unit 6e. In addition to the joint of the sheet 6d, the reference portion 6e may be anything that serves as a reference for alignment, such as a mark drawn on the front surface of the reel 6, a protrusion or a depression formed on the reel 6 itself.

  Further, the position of the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 and the position of the positioning portion 113 can be arbitrarily set. The reference portion 6e and the specific symbol may be arranged on a portion where the reel 6 can be visually recognized with the front frame 2 opened. That is, it is only necessary that the reference portion 6e is within a predetermined number of frames from a specific symbol. And it is possible to set the positioning part 113 according to this reference | standard part 6e. Further, the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols may be a line other than the middle line. Moreover, a specific symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the positioning part 113 according to each of the symbol stop line which can be selected by switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a. That is, here, the positioning unit 113 is provided only at the position corresponding to the middle line, but the positioning unit 113 may be provided also at the position corresponding to the lower right line and the lower left line. For example, the position corresponding to the lower right line is a position where the reference portion 6e is aligned so that a specific symbol of the left reel 6a is aligned with the upper position and a reference where the specific symbol of the right reel 6c is aligned with the lower position. This is the position where the part 6e is aligned.

  From the above, the variable display device 100 having a plurality of reels 6 capable of variable display of a plurality of symbols, the front open concave housing 1a that houses the variable display device 100, and the front surface of the housing 1a In a slot machine provided with a front door (front frame 2) provided with a window portion (symbol display window 5) that is supported so as to be openable and closable so that the front portions of the plurality of reels 6 can be visually recognized. Is a state in which specific symbols are arranged, respectively, and a symbol stop line positioned so as to cross the front part of the plurality of reels 6 and a plurality of reels 6 are rotated and the specific symbols are arranged on the symbol stop line. Manual operation assisting means (positioning part 113, reference part 6e) for assisting manual operation for

  Here, the symbol stop line (symbol alignment line) is a virtual line that connects symbols that are visible from the symbol display window 5 among the symbols of the reels 6 for which the variable display is stopped. It may be the same as the effective line for determining the formation of the winning combination, or may not match.

  Further, the manual operation assisting means positions the reference portion 6e provided on the reel so as to be within a predetermined number of frames from the specific symbol, and the reference portion 6e so that the specific symbol is positioned on the symbol stop line. The positioning part 113 for performing will be provided.

  Here, the reference portion 6e may be anything that serves as a reference for alignment, such as a mark drawn on the front surface of the reel 6, a joint of the reel 6, a protrusion or a depression formed on the reel 6 itself. In addition, the positioning unit 113 may be anything as long as it is a standard for matching the reference unit 6e.

  The reel 6 is configured by winding a strip-shaped sheet 6d on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction around the outer periphery of the rotating body, and the reference portion 6e is formed when the sheet 6d is wound around the rotating body. This is a seam of the sheet 6d to be formed.

  Further, a moving mechanism that enables the positioning unit 113 to operate along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 may be provided. The moving mechanism is composed of a rail extending up and down along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 and a moving body movable along the rail, and a positioning portion 113 is provided on the moving body. This makes it possible to change the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols. In addition, if the moving body can be moved step by step in accordance with the frame width so as to correspond to the upper, middle and lower symbol positions, it is easy to change the symbol stop line for aligning specific symbols. Furthermore, the moving body provided with the positioning unit 113 may be moved manually, but may be automatically moved in accordance with the switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a.

  The moving mechanism is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the positioning line 113a is formed of a light emitter, and is provided in advance so as to correspond to the upper, middle, and lower symbol positions, and the positioning line 113a that emits light is changed. It is good also as a mechanism which controls so that the positioning part 113 may move. The positioning line 113a for emitting light is selected according to the setting of the light emitting line setting switch 112a.

  That is, a plurality of symbol stop lines are set so as to cross the front portions of the plurality of reels 6 facing the window portion (symbol display window 5), so that the symbol stop lines for aligning specific symbols can be changed. In addition, a movement mechanism that allows the positioning unit 113 to move along the movement direction of the symbol may be provided.

  In addition, the moving mechanism may move the positioning unit 113 along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 and may move the positioning unit 113 stepwise in accordance with the frame width of the symbol.

  Further, in the positioning unit 113, only the positioning display unit 113b is shielded by the front panel 9 (decorative region around the symbol display window 5), but the positioning line 113a is also shielded by the front panel 9. All of the positioning portions 113 may be shielded by the front panel 9. Thereby, the beauty | look of the periphery of the symbol display window 5 can be improved more.

  That is, the front door (front frame 2) is provided with a shielding part (front panel 9) that restricts rearward visual recognition around the window part (symbol display window 5), and the positioning part 113 is in a state in which the front door is opened. In the case where the front door is closed, the front door may be shielded by the shielding portion.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control system of the slot machine 1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the component which is the same as that of the component demonstrated in FIG. 1, or it corresponds, and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the control system of the slot machine 1 controls a game control device (main control device) 50 that controls the game in an integrated manner, and controls related to the effects of the game under the control of the game control device 50. The production control device (sub-control device) 70 to be performed automatically and the power supply device 40 for supplying power to these control devices are provided. The components of this control system are arranged inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 respectively. In addition, the power supply device 40 is configured to supply backup power so that data stored in the RAM 50c and the RAM 70c (described later) is retained during a power failure.

  The game control device 50 is used for a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 50a, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 50b, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 50c, an input / output interface (hereinafter referred to as “I / F”) 50d, and an internal lottery. A random number generator 50e for generating various random numbers such as a winning determination random number is provided.

  The CPU 50a includes a control unit and a calculation unit, and performs various types of calculation processing, data input / output, generation of control signals, and the like as the calculation processing device of the game control device 50.

  The ROM 50b stores internal lottery determination values (determination tables) and the like in addition to control programs and control data for executing various processes. The ROM 50b stores a stop control table that is referred to when the reel 6 is stopped in each game. For example, there are a stop control table corresponding to various types of winning winnings, a stop control table corresponding to a loss, and the like. In the stop control table, the reel 6 pull-in stop control for forming the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning state (the state of the set winning flag) to the maximum on the effective line and various winnings not internally won. Stores the data for controlling the kicking stop of the reel that removes the corresponding symbol combination from the effective line (the maximum number of sliding frames of 4 frames, etc.), and the stop position depends on the operation stop order and operation timing of the reel 6 It is set in advance.

  In the RAM 50c, a random number storage area for internal lottery sampled by the CPU 50a based on the start operation, various data (for example, credit number data, bet number data, internal winning state data, and predetermined symbol combination modes are derived. A storage area for temporarily storing data relating to payout based on the data, data indicating the winning probability value of the internal lottery, and the work area of the CPU 50a.

  The I / F 50d includes a medal insertion detection switch 51, a start lever switch 52, a reel stop switch 53 (a first reel (left) stop switch 53a, a second reel (middle) stop switch) through a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). 53b, third reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), max bet switch 57, payout button switch 58 Various signals output from the payout medal detection switch 59, the setting device 60, the reset switch 61, the door open / close detection switch 62, the radio wave detection switch 81, the medal full switch 82, and the like are supplied to the CPU 50a.

  Here, the medal insertion detection switch 51 is provided in the flow path switching solenoid (medal selector) 68 to detect the passage of the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 15, and the medal insertion is based on this detection information. The number of sheets is counted. The start lever switch 52 is a switch for detecting that the start lever 21 has been operated.

  The first reel (left) stop switch 53a, the second reel (middle) stop switch 53b, and the third reel (right) stop switch 53c of the reel stop switch 53 are operated by the corresponding reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, and 24c. It is a switch for detecting that it has been performed. The left reel position detection switch 54a, the middle reel position detection switch 54b, and the right reel position detection switch 54c of the reel position detection switch 54 are switches for detecting the rotation phases of the corresponding reels 6a, 6b, and 6c. .

  The max bet switch 57 is a switch for detecting that the max bet button 17 has been operated. The withdrawal button switch 58 is a switch for detecting that the withdrawal button 20 has been operated. The payout medal detection switch 59 detects the medals paid out from the medal payout device 63, and the number of medals paid out is counted by counting the detection signals from the switches.

  The setting device 60 is for switching the setting of the slot machine 1 based on the setting change operation. With this setting device 60, for example, the winning probabilities (internal winning probabilities) of various winnings (combinations) in the internal lottery for each game are set to any of a plurality of settings (for example, settings 1 to 6).

  The reset switch 61 is, for example, a switch for detecting that the key inserted into the keyhole 23 is rotated in the opposite direction to when the front frame 2 is opened, and resets the slot machine 1 based on this detection. is there. Note that the game control device 50 cancels the error state of the slot machine 1 based on the detection signal from the reset switch 61, for example. The door open / close detection switch 62 is a switch for detecting the open state of the front frame 2.

  The radio wave detection switch 81 is for detecting abnormal radio waves and for preventing fraud. The medal full switch 82 detects that the medals in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 are full.

  In addition, the I / F 50d sends a control signal output from the CPU 50a to an effect control device 70, a credit number display unit 11, a game progress display unit 12, a payout number display unit 13, a game via an output port and a driver (not shown). Status display unit 18, bet number display unit 19, medal payout device 63, reel motor 64 (left reel motor 64a, middle reel motor 64b, right reel motor 64c), external signal output terminal (with the slot machine 1) Are output to a terminal 33) connected to a management device provided separately, the flow path switching solenoid 68, and the like. Thereby, the game control device 50 can control various components.

  The control signal output to the external signal output terminal 33 includes, for example, a signal indicating the number of bets output when the start lever 21 is operated (game medal insertion signal), and a payout output when a medal is paid out. A signal indicating the number of medals (game medal payout signal), a signal indicating that the premium bonus state is being set (PB signal), a signal indicating that the big bonus state is being set (BB signal), and being in the regular bonus state Signal (RB signal), a signal indicating that the replay time state is in effect (RT signal), a signal (security signal) output when the front frame 2 is opened or when a setting is changed.

  In the game control device 50, for example, the CPU 50 a updates the random number every predetermined cycle time (for example, +1), performs the control of sampling the random number at that time at the detection timing by the start lever switch 52, and the sampled random number is Internal lottery is performed as a random number for internal lottery. Further, the game control device 50 refers to the corresponding stop control table based on the internal lottery result and the stop operation timing of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, and operates the reel motors 64a, 64b, 64c. By controlling, the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c are stopped so that a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 5. Note that the random number generated by the random number generator 50e may be sampled.

  Furthermore, the game control device 50, when the symbol constituting the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning prize (combination) is stopped before reaching the valid line, the reels 6a, 6b, 6c. A so-called pull-in stop control is performed to delay the timing to stop the display so that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line. In addition, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning that is not won internally is formed on the active line, the timing to stop the reels 6a, 6b, 6c is delayed to The so-called kicking stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the symbol combination form that can be formed in the same manner pass the effective line. In the pull-in stop control and the kick-off stop control by the game control device 50, the time value at which the stop timing can be changed (delayed) is determined in advance, and the stop operation is normally performed (in the case of 21 frames per reel). The time value is such that it can be drawn or kicked within a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 4 frames) from the position where it was performed.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 70 includes a CPU 70a, a ROM 70b, a RAM 70c, an I / F 70d, and the like. The effect control device 70 controls the effect display in the image display device (liquid crystal display device) 3 based on the information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50, and the effect by the backlight 111, the frame light emitting device 7, and the speaker 4. Control. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as a backlight control means capable of performing light emission control of the backlight 111. In addition, the volume setting when performing an effect or the like by the speaker 4 can be performed by the volume control switch 69 connected to the effect control device 70.

  Further, the effect control device 70 controls the stop button LED 66, the winning line light emitting unit 112, and the movable effect device 8 based on information related to the game supplied from the game control device 50. Furthermore, based on the input information from the light emission line setting switch 112a, the effect mode is changed based on the control for lighting the predetermined winning line light emitting unit 112 when the front frame 2 is opened and the input information from the effect button 10. Control and so on. That is, the effect control device 70 serves as an operation unit light emission control unit capable of performing light emission control of the operation unit light emission unit (stop button LED 66). Note that the stop button LED 66 enters a valid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop valid command, and enters an invalid notification lighting state based on the reception of the stop command. The invalid notification lighting state may be turned off.

  Here, the information relating to the game supplied from the game control device 50 includes bet number information (for example, the number of pulses corresponding to the bet number) that is output when the start lever 21 is operated and the game is started. , Information that conveys the number of bets and the number of games), internal winning information indicating the lottery result by internal lottery, gaming state information indicating the current gaming state (normal state, special gaming state, RT state 1, 2, etc.), fluctuation The reel stop information indicating that the reel stop button 24 corresponding to the reel 6 being displayed has been operated is included.

  The I / F 70d outputs various signals input from the game control device 50 and input signals from the light emission line setting switch 112a and the effect button switch 10a to the CPU 70a via a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). The I / F 70d receives a control signal input from the CPU 70a via an output port and a driver (not shown), the image display device 3, the speaker 4, the movable effect device 8, a frame light emitting device 7 including a lamp, an LED, and the like. Output to the stop button LED 66, the backlight 111 composed of LEDs, etc., the winning line light emitting unit 112, and the like. As a result, the image display device 3 and the speaker 4 can be controlled by the effect control device 70.

  Thereby, for example, the effect control device 70 performs control to display a small role winning notice display, a special winning notification display, an effect display (thing completed in one game or over a plurality of games) on the image display device 3. Do. In addition, the effect control device 70 performs decoration by light emission from the frame light emitting device 7 provided on the front frame 2 and effects by sound from the speaker 4. Note that the communication between the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 described above is in a form in which a control signal can be transmitted only in one direction from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. An illegal signal is prevented from being input to the game control device 50.

  Here, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. When playing a game in the slot machine 1, the player first inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 15 or operates the max bet button 17 to input the bet number (betting input). When the betting input is performed, the active line is set, and the operation of the start lever 21 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the start lever 21 is operated, an internal lottery process is performed in the game control device 50 to determine whether or not the winning (role) is won and the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c start to change.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed, the reels 6a, 6b, 6c are stopped from rotating based on the operation of the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c in which the stop operation is enabled, and a predetermined symbol is displayed in the symbol display window 5. . When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning winning is formed on the active line, the winning is established, and the medal corresponding to the winning is paid out. The game of one segment is completed as described above, and thereafter, the game is advanced by repeating this operation.

  FIG. 5 shows an example of an arrangement of symbols on the sheet 6d wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c included in the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the sheet 6d includes “7”, “BAR”, “Bell”, “White Watermelon”, “Black Watermelon”, “White Cherry”, “Black Cherry”, “White Replay”. ”,“ Black Replay ”, and“ REP ”which can be identified are arranged in a predetermined order. The upper and lower end portions of each sheet 6 d are portions that become seams when wound around the reel 6. This portion constitutes the reference portion 6e for alignment described above, and “7” is arranged as a specific symbol on the frame immediately above the reference portion 6e.

  FIG. 6 shows the types of winning (role) in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination mode corresponding to each winning, and the winning contents. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a special prize, a premium bonus prize (PB prize), a big bonus 1 prize (BB1 prize), a big bonus 2 prize (BB2 prize), and a regular bonus prize (RB prize) are defined. . Each special prize winning flag (a flag set when winning an internal lottery) is treated separately. Note that if the special winning is won internally, the winning flag is carried over to the next game and the special winning can be established in subsequent games even if the special winning can not be established in the internally won game.

  The number of medals paid out when the special prize is established is 0, but when the PB prize, the BB1 prize, the BB2 prize or the RB prize is established, the PB state, the BB1 state, and the BB2 state corresponding to the respective special games state. Or, an RB condition occurs. In this special game state, a game is executed using a determination table in which the internal winning probability of a small role winning is higher than in the normal game state, and the number of payouts in the special game state exceeds a predetermined number, The special game state is ended by executing the game a number of times. In the special gaming state, the JAC game (a game in which the internal winning probability of a predetermined winning combination becomes high probability when a JAC in winning is established) is repeatedly executed until the total number of medals to be paid out reaches a specified number. Alternatively, the JAC game may be executed in combination with a game having a high internal winning probability of the small role winning.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, single bonus prizes (SIN prizes), bell prizes, Ripbell prizes, single-piece prizes, normal replay prizes, special replay 1 (promotion) prizes, special replays 2 (special replays 2) Inrush), a special replay 3 (relegation) award, a 10-piece winning award, and a 3-piece winning award are defined. The Ripbell winning can be established only in the RB state that is started based on the establishment of the RB winning, and the 10-player combination can be established only in the PB state that is started based on the establishment of the PB winning. Of these small part winnings, other than the replay winning are awarded, and the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. In addition, when a replay winning is established, medals are paid out to 0, but a replay game (replay game) that can be executed without a betting operation is given.

  In addition, in the above small prize winnings, there are those that are further distinguished (separate flags) by the derived effective lines (in this case, the middle stage line and the slug line (upward or downward right line)). In addition, there are some cases that cannot be established unless the operation order (push order) of the predetermined reel stop button 24 is used. For example, the Bell winning a prize is distinguished from those derived to the middle line and those derived to the name line (upward or downward right line). Furthermore, there is a case where the bell winnings derived to the name line are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. In the following description, the bell winnings derived to the middle line may be referred to as “middle bell winnings”, and those derived to the name line may be referred to as “named bell winnings”.

  Among the three-piece symbol combinations, symbol combinations in which the left reel 6a is not cherry and the right reel 6c is other than black replay, and symbol combinations composed of white or black watermelon are also derived to the middle line. And those derived to the slant line (upward or rightward line). In addition, when the left reel 6a of the symbol combination is a bell in the combination of 3 sheets, it can be derived only to the right downward line. In this case, the apparent bell is arranged on the upper line, and in the following explanation, This prize may be referred to as an upper bell prize.

  In addition, there are some replay winnings that cannot be established unless they are in the specified pushing order, and those that are differentiated between those derived to the middle line and those derived to the name line (upward or downward right line). is there. For example, special replay winning prizes 1 to 3 are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. Furthermore, the special replay winning prize 2 is distinguished by what is derived to the middle line and what is derived to the name line.

  When a small winning combination is won internally, the small winning combination can be established only in the internally winning game. In other words, depending on the timing of the stop operation, depending on the type of the small role winning, even if the drawing stop control of 4 frames is performed due to the symbol arrangement, the small winning winning cannot be established or there is no pressing order. If there is a small role winning that may not be able to be established, and such a small role winning is not achieved by internal winning (so-called “missing”), The winning flag for this small role winning is cleared and is not carried over to the next game. In addition, although a combination of small role winnings may be established, the maximum payout number in one game is set to 15.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in the same game, a special prize and a predetermined small role prize (see FIG. 8) can be won internally. In addition, when a win for a small role is won in a game after a game that has been internally won for the special prize and the winning flag is carried over, the priority order of the winnings derived on the active line is Replay Prize> Replay Other than winning a prize, it is considered as a special prize. In other words, even if the special winning flag is carried over, if the small winnings are won internally, the establishment of the small winnings is given priority, and the drawing stop control is performed so that the small winnings are achieved. .

  When one of the above winnings is won internally by the internal lottery in the game control device 50, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning of the internal winning can be derived on a predetermined active line. On the other hand, if any winning is not won internally, the winning combination is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning is not formed on the active line.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of a reach that can be derived when a special prize is won internally. The first positive shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is a reach that is established when the fluctuation of only the left reel 6a is stopped, and the second positive shown in FIG. This is the reach that is established when the fluctuation of only the right reel 6c is stopped. Further, the third probability shown in FIGS. 7D to 7H is a reach that is established when the fluctuations of all the reels 6a, 6b, and 6c are stopped.

  FIG. 8 shows an example of a stop type of a rare small role (rare role). These rare prizes are prizes that may be won internally by overlapping with the BB1 prize, the BB2 prize, or the RB prize. In the figure, “ANY” means that the stop type of the reel 6 does not matter. Further, the watermelons of the left reel 6a and the right reel 6c in FIGS. 8A and 8C may be black watermelons. Further, the middle stage of the right reel 6c in FIG. 8D means a symbol other than black replay.

  FIG. 9 shows a list of internal lottery combinations that can occur in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the small role winning, there are a single winning in which the small winnings are won independently, and a duplicate winning in which the winnings overlap with other small winnings and special winnings. It should be noted that “three overlapping winning combinations” such as the three winning combinations A to E, the bell G, and the single winning combination A and B mean that a single winning combination is included. In addition, when the three-piece role C (middle cherries) is not won in duplicate with the BB winning, an AT right that is a right to shift to an AT state assisting the derivation of the established small role is generated and stocked. .

  Among the internal lottery combinations shown here, there are those in which the possibility of establishment is determined according to the pressing order. For example, all of the promoted replays A to F are special replay 1 wins, but they are not established (missed) unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. The rush replays A to F are special replay 2 wins, but they are not established unless they are in a predetermined push order. The rush replays A to F are further distinguished from those derived to the middle stage line and those derived to the slant line (upward or rightward line) (separate flags).

  Further, the extra name play and the extra middle stage replay are special replay 2 winnings. These extra slender play and extra middle replay are not established unless they are in a predetermined push order, and six kinds of push orders different from each other are included. Special Replay Winner 2 is basically called an Inrush Replay Winner because it triggers entry into the AT state that assists the derivation of established small roles. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of establishment, the acquisition of AT rights Or the number of games in the AT state may be added, and in this case, it may be referred to as an extra replay prize.

  Further, the falling replays A to F are special replay 3 winnings, but they are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order. In addition, although bells A to F (named bells) all win the bell, they are not established unless they are in a predetermined pushing order.

  Among the special winning combinations, the PB winning is only a single winning, and the BB1 winning, the BB2 winning, and the RB winning have a single winning as well as a double winning with a rare small role. Rare small roles are three-piece roles A to E (weak, strong, middle cherry, weak, strong watermelon), bell G (middle bell), and one-piece role (chance eyes A and B). Note that the rare small combination may include a net loss that is not internally won in any winnings.

  FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be broadly divided into a normal gaming state ST10, a special gaming state ST20 that shifts when a special winning is established, and a special condition established in the special gaming state ST20. There is a specific game state ST30 that is shifted to after the game state ends or when a specific condition is satisfied in the normal game state ST10. The specific game state ST30 is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST10.

  The normal gaming state ST10 includes a low probability state ST11 with a low probability of winning in the AT right acquisition lottery (AT right acquisition probability), a high probability state ST12 with a higher probability than the low probability state ST11, and a high probability state. There is an ultra-high accuracy state ST13 having a higher probability than ST12. The transition of the internal state is performed by lottery.

  In the normal gaming state ST10, when a PB winning, BB1 winning, BB2 winning or RB winning which is a special winning is internally won, and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and winning is established, the game proceeds to the special gaming state ST20. Specifically, when a symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning for PB winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the PB state ST21. When the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning of the BB1 winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the BB1 state ST22. When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning of the BB2 winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the BB2 state ST23. When the symbol combination aspect corresponding to the internal winning of the RB winning is derived and winning is established, the process proceeds to the RB state ST24.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state ST10, when there is AT right stock (AT stock is present) and the transition condition that the digestion of the precursor game executed until the AT is activated is satisfied, the preparation AT of the specific gaming state ST30 The process proceeds to state ST34. Further, in the normal game state ST10, when the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won, the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived, and the winning condition is established, the transition condition is established, the transition chance of the specific gaming state ST30 Transition to state ST31.

  Further, when the special gaming state ST20 is completed, if there is an AT right stock, the process proceeds to the preparation AT state ST34 of the specific gaming state ST30, and if there is no AT right stock, the process proceeds to the normal gaming state ST10. In the special game state ST20, a lottery for acquiring the AT right is performed.

  In the transition chance state ST31 of the specific gaming state ST30, the internal winning probability of the replay winning is higher than the normal gaming state ST10 (RT state). As a result, it is possible to play games while suppressing the consumption of medals. Accordingly, it is possible to expect winning of a special prize while increasing the gaming value obtained by winning the small part prize. When the transition condition is satisfied in the transition chance state ST31, the state shifts to the ART (assist replay time) state ST35. The case where the transition condition is satisfied is a case where a winning is established by acquiring a new AT right and deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to an internal winning for the replay (special replay 2). Here, when a new AT right is acquired, the state may be shifted to the ART standby state ST33.

  On the other hand, when the fall condition due to the occurrence of violation is satisfied in the transition chance state ST31, the transition to the normal gaming state ST10 is made. Note that the fall condition due to the violation occurs when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that has not been established in a predetermined order is missed (push order bell spilling) ). In any state of the specific game state ST30, when the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning of the special winning is derived, the state shifts to the special game state ST20.

  In the ART state ST35, the internal winning probability of the replay winning (normal replay winning) is higher than the normal gaming state ST10 within the prescribed number of games (RT state), and the derivation of the established small role is assisted (SIN winning) In the case of, avoidance of establishment is assisted) (AT state). Note that the expected increase in medals per game is about 1.5. The ART state ST35 includes an ART state 1ST35a and an ART state 2ST35b, and either one is selected depending on the type of AT right.

  In the ART state 1ST35a, one set (30 games) of the ART state is executed for one AT right. Further, the ART state is continued only by adding the number of sets. That is, if a new AT right is acquired, the number of sets corresponding to this is added. In the ART state 2ST35b, one set (30 games) of the ART state can be executed for one AT right, and the number of games that can be executed in this ART state can be added.

  There are an extra zone 1ST35b1 and an extra zone 2ST35b2 as the period in which the number of games is added. The extra zone 1 is an extra number of variable games, and an extra lottery is performed for each game, and 5 to 100 games are added according to the lottery result. This extra zone 1 continues for 2 to 25 games. The extra zone 2 is an extra fixed game number, and each game will be added lottery and continuous lottery in the extra zone 2, and if the extra lottery is won, 100 games will be added, and if the continuous lottery is won Add-on zone 2 continues.

  In the ART state ST35, when the specified number of games are consumed and the demotion condition is reached in which there is no stock of AT rights, the transition is made to the transition chance state ST31. On the other hand, in the ART state ST35, when the transition condition is reached in which the prescribed number of games has been consumed but the AT right stock exists, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. In the ART state ST35, when the demotion condition due to the occurrence of the violation is satisfied, the state shifts to the relief AT state ST32. The establishment of the demote condition due to the occurrence of a violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that has not been established unless it has been pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spilling). ).

  In the rescue AT state ST32, derivation of the established small role is assisted within the range of the number of games that have not been consumed in the ART state ST35, but the internal winning probability of the replay winning is made equal to that in the normal game state ST10. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a win for the special prize while increasing the game value obtained by the establishment of the small role prize, but the expected increase in medals per game is lower than the ART state ST35.

  When the promotion condition is satisfied in the repair AT state ST32, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. The case where the promotion condition is satisfied is a case where a winning combination is established by deriving an internal winning combination for promotion replay (special replay 1) and deriving a corresponding symbol combination mode. On the other hand, when the fall condition is satisfied in the relief AT state ST32, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10. Satisfaction of the fall condition here means occurrence of violation (fall fall replay (special replay 3) win or SIN win, missing bell win (push order bell spill) that does not hold unless a predetermined push order) or ART This is a case where the number of games set in the state 35 is exhausted.

  In the ART standby state ST33, as in the ART state ST35, a game in which the internal winning probability of the replay winning is higher than that in the normal game state ST10 is executed, and a game for assisting the derivation of the established small role is executed. . Note that the expected increase in medals per game is about 1.5, which is the same expected value as in the ART state ST35.

  In the ART standby state ST33, when the entry replay (special replay 2) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and the winning condition is established, the state is shifted to the ART state 35. On the other hand, in the ART standby state ST33, a fall condition due to occurrence of a violation (falling replay (special replay 3) winning or SIN winning, bell winning missing (pushing order bell spilling) that does not hold unless a predetermined pushing order) occurs. If established, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10.

  In the preparation AT state ST34, a game for assisting the derivation of the established small role is executed, but the internal winning probability of the replay winning is made equal to that in the normal gaming state ST10. Accordingly, it is possible to expect a win for the special prize while increasing the game value obtained by the establishment of the small role prize, but the expected increase in medals per game is lower than the ART state ST35. In addition, the assistance for deriving the established small role is started from the next game of the game in which the winning of a bell that is not established unless it is in a predetermined pushing order is missed (pushing order bell spilling).

  When the promotion condition is established in the preparation AT state ST34, the state shifts to the ART standby state ST33. The case where the promotion condition is satisfied is a case where a winning combination is established by deriving an internal winning combination for promotion replay (special replay 1) and deriving a corresponding symbol combination mode. On the other hand, when the fall condition due to the violation occurs in the preparation AT state ST34, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST10. The establishment of the fall condition due to the occurrence of a violation here is a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize, or a missed bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order (push order bell spill). . However, before the assist starts, even if a push-down bell spill occurs, the falling condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 11 shows a state transition diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the game control device 50. The normal state ST40 is a non-RT state that is not an RT state, and the winning probabilities of normal replay, promotion replay (special replay 1), rush replay (special replay 2), and fall replay (special replay 3) are in a low probability state. The winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1/8 in the internal lottery. In FIG. 10, a corresponding portion is described as a non-RT state.

  Specifically, the normal replay winning probability is a normal probability. In addition, if the winning combination of the promotion replay and the fall replay occurs with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/15 in the internal lottery), the promotion replay and the fall replay can be established if the pushing order is applied. The rush replay is not won or is won with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and the rush replay can be established only when the first stop is the right reel 6c. Yes. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won in the normal state ST40 and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and the promotion condition in which a winning is established is established, the process proceeds to the RT state 1ST41. This RT state 1ST41 is an RT state in which the winning probability of the replay winning is higher than the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the promotion replay (special replay 1), the rush replay (special replay 2), and the fall replay (special replay 3) is The high probability state is higher than the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the normal replay is the same as the normal state ST40, and the winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1 / 1.5 in the internal lottery. ing. In FIG. 10, the RT state 1 is described at the corresponding location. In addition, you may make the winning probability of normal replay higher than normal state ST40.

  Specifically, the normal replay winning probability is a normal probability. In addition, if the winning combination of the promotion replay and the fall replay occurs with a very high probability (for example, ½ in the internal lottery), and the pushing order is applied, the promotion replay and the fall replay can be established. Further, if the winning winning combination of the rush replay and the falling replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery) and the pushing order is applied, it is possible to establish the rushing replay and the falling replay. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the fall condition is satisfied in the RT state 1ST41, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Satisfaction of this fall condition is a violation (when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spill)). It is the generation and winning of bonus prize (special prize). If the winning and winning of the bonus winning occurs in the same game, the process shifts to the special gaming state ST43.

  In RT state 1ST41, when the entry replay (special replay 2) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and a winning condition is established, the process proceeds to RT state 2ST42. This RT state 2ST42 is an RT state in which the winning probability of the replay winning is higher than that in the normal state ST40, and the winning probability of the normal replay is a higher probability state than in the normal state ST40, and promoted replay (special replay 1) The winning probability of replay (special replay 2) and falling replay (special replay 3) is the same probability state as the normal state ST40, and the winning probability obtained by adding these replay winnings is 1 / 1.5 in the internal lottery. ing. In FIG. 10, the corresponding state is indicated as RT state 2.

  Specifically, the winning probability of normal replay is higher than that of the normal state ST40 and the RT state 1ST41. Promotion replay is not won or overlaps with normal replay with very low probability (for example, 1/1000 in internal lottery), but promotion replay is only possible when the first stop is the right reel 6c push order. Yes. In addition, duplicate winning between the rush replay and the normal replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery). In this case, the rush replay is established in one way selected from the six pushing orders, and the others Normal replay is established in the order of pressing. In addition, the overlap winning of the fall replay and the normal replay occurs with a high probability (for example, 1/10 in the internal lottery). In this case, the fall replay is established in five ways selected from the six pushing orders. Normal replay is established in the order of pressing. Overlap replay and normal replay winning are generated with a low probability (for example, 1/100 in the internal lottery), and it is possible to establish an extra replay or a normal replay if the pushing order is applied. When an extra replay is established, a new AT right is generated or the number of ART games is added.

  When the falling condition is satisfied in the RT state 2ST42, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Satisfaction of this fall condition is a violation (when a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spill)). It is the generation and winning of bonus prize (special prize). If the winning and winning of the bonus winning occurs in the same game, the process shifts to the special gaming state ST43.

  When a bonus prize (special prize) is established in the normal state ST40, the process proceeds to the special game state ST43. If the winning and winning of the bonus prize occurs in the same game in the RT state 1ST41 or the RT state 2ST42, the process shifts to the special game state ST43 without passing through the normal state ST40. In the special game state ST43, when the end condition according to the type of the special winning established is satisfied and the bonus is ended, the process proceeds to the normal state ST40. Note that, except during the special game state, the winning probabilities other than the replay winning (small role winning, special winning) are always constant. Further, when a special prize is established, the state may be shifted to the RT state 2ST42.

  In FIG. 12, the state transition diagram for demonstrating the transition of the game state in the production | presentation control apparatus 70 was shown. In the non-assist state ST50 in which the derivation of the established small role is not assisted, the AT right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery has a low probability state, a high probability state with a higher probability than the low probability state, and a high probability state There is an ultra-high-accuracy state with a higher probability, and the state shifts when the mode transition condition is satisfied. The mode transition condition is, for example, winning a lottery performed at the time of rare small role winning. This non-assist state ST50 corresponds to the normal game state in FIG.

  In the non-assist state ST50, when the promotion replay (special replay 1) is internally won and the corresponding symbol combination mode is derived and a winning condition is established, the transition is made to the transition chance effect state ST51. In the transition chance production state ST51, the assistance for deriving the established small role is not performed. This transition chance production state ST51 corresponds to the transition chance state ST31 in FIG.

  When the transition condition is established in the transition chance effect state ST51, the process proceeds to the specific assist state ST55. The transition condition is that a new AT right is acquired, and that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2). In addition, when the fall condition due to the occurrence of violation is satisfied in the transition chance effect state ST51, the state shifts to the non-assist state ST50. The fall condition due to the occurrence of the violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined pushing order (push order bell spilling). It is.

  Further, when the AT right is acquired in the non-assist state ST50 (including the case where the AT right is acquired by reaching the ceiling), the state shifts to the precursor game state ST52. This precursor game state ST52 corresponds to the normal game state in FIG. In the precursor game state ST52, the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery becomes a low probability state with a low probability. In the precursor game state ST52, the precursor effect that suggests that the ART state is generated is performed. The number of continuation games for this sign production can be selected from 11, 13, 15, 17 or 19 games.

  When the number of precursor games is exhausted in the precursor game state ST52, the process shifts to the assist standby state ST53. This assist standby state ST53 corresponds to the state before the start of assist in the preparation AT state ST34 in FIG. In the assist standby state ST53, the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery becomes a low probability state with a low probability. In the assist standby state ST53, an effect of displaying a screen for informing that the AT is started is performed. In this assist standby state ST53, if a push-order bell spill occurs that misses a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order, the process proceeds to the transition assist state ST54.

  Further, in the assist standby state ST53, when the fall condition is satisfied and there is an AT right stock, the state shifts to the precursor game state ST52. The falling condition here is a fall replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. In the assist standby state ST53, if the fall condition is satisfied and there is no AT right stock, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. The falling condition here is a fall replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. In the assist standby state ST53, information for assisting the avoidance of the SIN prize is notified, but information for assisting the establishment of the push order bell is not notified.

  The transition assist state ST54 is a state in which information for assisting promotion replay, rush replay, establishment of push order bell winning and avoidance of SIN winning is notified. Note that the right acquisition probability in the AT right acquisition lottery is in a low probability state with a low probability. This transition assist state ST54 corresponds to the state after the start of assist in the relief AT state ST32, the ART standby state ST33, and the preparation AT state ST34 in FIG. When the transition condition is satisfied in the transition assist state ST54, the transition is made to the specific assist state ST55. The transition condition is that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2).

  The specific assist state ST55 is a state in which the derivation of the established small role is assisted. In the case of a SIN prize, avoidance of establishment is assisted. In the specific assist state, the game number fixed assist state ST55a and the game number variable assist state ST55b are set. This specific assist state ST55 corresponds to the ART state ST35 in FIG. 10, the game number fixed assist state ST55a corresponds to the ART state 1ST35a, and the game number variable assist state ST55b corresponds to the ART state 2ST35b.

  In the game number fixed assist state ST55a, the probability of right acquisition in the AT right acquisition lottery is a low probability state with a low probability, a high probability state with a higher probability than the low probability state, and a super high state with a higher probability than the high probability state. There is a certain state, and the state transitions when the mode transition condition is satisfied. The mode transition condition is, for example, winning a lottery performed at the time of rare small role winning. Then, an AT right acquisition lottery is performed with a probability corresponding to the above-mentioned lottery state. When a new AT right is acquired, the number of sets is increased, and a specific assist state ST55 of 30 games per set can be executed. .

  In the game number variable assist state ST55b, there are a normal zone ST55b0, a special zone 1ST55b1, and a special zone 2ST55b2, and the zone shifts when the zone transition condition is satisfied. The specialized zone 1ST55b1 corresponds to the added zone 1ST35b1 in FIG. 10, and the specialized zone 2ST55b2 corresponds to the added zone 2ST35b2 in FIG.

  In this specific assist state ST55, when the demotion condition due to the occurrence of the violation is satisfied, the state shifts to the transition assist state ST54. The establishment of the demote condition due to the occurrence of a violation means that a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or a SIN prize has been established, or a bell prize that has not been established unless it has been pushed in a predetermined order (push order bell spilling). ). In the specific assist state ST55, when the prescribed number of games is exhausted but there is an AT right stock, the transition assist state ST54 is entered. When the specified number of games is exhausted and there is no AT right stock in the specific assist state ST55, the state shifts to the transition chance effect state ST51.

  The transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 10 is combined with the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. 12 and the transition of the gaming state shown in FIG. Has been realized. In other words, the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70 change the gaming state into a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined winning combination for the transitional role. It is a game state switching means that can be switched. In addition, the transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Promotional role includes promotion replay prize. In addition, a rush replay prize that triggers the transition from the transition chance state ST31 without assist to the ART state ST35 with assist can be included in the promotion combination for switching to a state advantageous to the player. Relegation roles include a fall replay prize and a SIN prize. In addition, a push-bell winning prize that is disadvantageous to the player, such as the RT state being terminated due to missing, can be included in the relegation role.

  FIG. 13 shows how the AT right is acquired in the special game state based on each special prize. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the PB winning is established, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b is stocked. Further, in the PB state ST21 that is started based on the establishment of the PB winning, every time BAR is aligned, 30 games are added as the number of games that can be executed in the ART state 2ST35b. This PB state is terminated when ten bats are derived three times without BARs being prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (b), in the BB1 state started based on the establishment of the BB1 winning, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a or the ART state 2 is obtained every time the special replay 2 winning (additional replay winning) is established. Stocked. When the black replays are arranged at an angle (the formation of the name change replay winning), the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is stocked. The formation of the Naname Add-on Replay win occurs at 1/80. Further, when black replays are arranged in the middle stage (middle stage replay winning is established), AT rights corresponding to ART state 2ST35b are stocked. The middle stage replay winning will occur at 1/200. After the additional replay winning is established, the reel 6 restarts and stops, and an operation-mediated freeze effect (so-called 0G ream) that can derive up to eight consecutive replay winnings can be executed. The number of AT rights (AT rights corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b) corresponding to the number of times of the derived extra replay winning is stocked. This BB1 state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 360.

  In the BB2 state that is started based on the establishment of the BB2 winning, an AT right acquisition lottery corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a or the ART state 2 is performed every time a middle bell winning is generated. When a lottery is won, AT rights corresponding to the lottery result are stocked. Information on the AT right acquisition result is notified in the final game in the BB2 state. This BB2 state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 280.

  In the RB state that is started based on the establishment of the RB winning, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is acquired according to the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the RB state and the number of correct answers of the six-selection push order bells A lottery will be held. If the selection of the six-selection pressing order bell is correctly answered and the establishment of the name slump winning is generated four times, the acquisition of the AT right corresponding to the ART state 1ST35a is confirmed. This RB state ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 60. If a predetermined freeze effect is generated during these special game states, the AT right corresponding to the ART state 2ST35b is confirmed to be acquired.

  Next, processing by the game control device 50 will be described. The process by the game control device 50 includes a game control process (see FIG. 14) for overall control of the game, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) performed every predetermined time (for example, about every 2 msec).

[Game control processing]
First, the game control process will be described. FIG. 14 shows a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. This game control process is executed by the CPU 50a reading and executing the control program of the game control process stored in the ROM 50b when the power of the gaming machine 50 is turned on when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on. Is started.

  In the game control process, first, a power-on process for initializing a register in the CPU 50a of the game control device 50 or initializing game data stored in the RAM 50c is executed (step S1).

  Next, a bet number is set by a betting operation (that is, a medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 15 or an input from a credit) or an automatic betting operation based on establishment of a replay winning, and a bet number command is transmitted to the effect control device 70. A betting number / credit number control process is executed (step S2). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the payout button 20 has been operated. When it is determined that the payout button 20 has been operated, the inserted medal is refunded and the medal stored as credit is refunded. The medal clearing process to be transmitted to is executed (step S3).

  Then, it is determined whether the bet number is an upper limit value (for example, 3) (step S4). If the bet number has not reached the upper limit value (step S4; N), the process returns to step S2. If the bet number has reached the upper limit (step S4; Y), it is determined whether or not the start lever 21 has been operated (step S5).

  When the start lever 21 is not operated (step S5; N), the process returns to step S2. When the start lever 21 is operated (step S5; Y), the replay flag set based on the establishment of the replay winning is cleared (step S6), and the flow path switching solenoid (selector) 68 is operated. Then, a medal insertion prohibition operation is set for converting to a insertion restriction state in which the medal cannot be inserted (step S7).

  Thereafter, an internal lottery of a winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is performed, and an internal lottery process (step S8) is performed in which a lottery result command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 70. As a setting related to the freeze effect, which is an effect that is invalidated over time, a freeze effect setting process is performed for setting the execution of the freeze effect based on the internal lottery result and managing the number of games until the freeze effect is executed (step) S9).

  Next, a reel rotation start process (step S10) for executing the set freeze effect or setting the fluctuation start (rotation start) of the reel 6 is performed, and a winning / winning flag set based on the result of the internal lottery In response to the operation timing of the reel stop button 24, a reel rotation stop process (step S11) for performing a process related to stopping (rotating stop) the fluctuation display of each reel 6 is performed.

  Then, the symbol combination mode stopped and displayed on the active line based on the reel position information from the reel position detection switch 54 (specifically, the rotation phase of the reel 6 detected by the reel position detection switch 54) is displayed. It is determined whether or not the winning winning flag is determined, and it is determined whether or not a winning is achieved, and a winning determination process (step S12) for setting payout number information when the winning is achieved is performed.

  Thereafter, a payout control process (step S13) for adding credits or paying out medals by the medal payout device 63 based on the payout number information is performed, and the gaming state (normal state, special game) shown in FIG. 11 according to the established condition. A gaming state update process (step S14) for controlling the transition of the states (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, RB state), RT state 1, RT state 2) is performed. Then, the flow path switching solenoid (selector) 68 is operated to convert to a insertion allowable state in which medals can be inserted, thereby canceling the medal insertion prohibiting operation (step S15), and the process returns to step S2.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the timer interrupt process, first, a register saving process (step S21) is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RAM 50c, and inputs from various sensors are taken. An input process for reading the port state is executed (step S22).

  The inputs captured in this input process (step S22) are the medal insertion detection switch 51, the start lever switch 52, the reel stop switch 53 (first reel (left) stop switch 53a, second reel (middle) stop switch 53b, 3 reel (right) stop switch 53c), reel position detection switch 54 (left reel position detection switch 54a, middle reel position detection switch 54b, right reel position detection switch 54c), max bet switch 57, payout button switch 58, payout medal Detection switch 59, reset switch 61, door open / close detection switch 62, radio wave detection switch 81, medal full switch 82, etc.) and setting device 60.

  Next, as processing related to security, when an input from the medal insertion detection switch 51 is an input indicating an abnormality, a processing corresponding to this is performed, or a medal insertion error command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 The input error monitoring process (step S23) is performed. Further, as a security-related process, a radio wave error monitoring process for performing a process corresponding to detection of abnormal radio wave irradiation based on an input from the radio wave detection switch 81 or transmitting a radio wave illegal command to the effect control device 70. (Step S24) is performed to monitor the state of the front frame 2 based on the input from the door open / close detection switch 62 as a security-related process, and to control the production of the door open command or the door close command according to the opening / closing of the front frame 2. The door opening monitoring process (step S25) transmitted to the apparatus 70 is performed. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an opening detection means capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame 2).

  Next, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored, and when the power failure occurs, a power shut-off process (step S26) is performed to perform processing when the power failure occurs. As processing at the time of the occurrence of a power failure, for example, after stopping the payout of medals, backing up information of the RAM 50c, storing the stack pointer, checksum, etc., the RAM access is prohibited and the power of the slot machine 1 is shut off. Wait for If no power failure has occurred, the power cut-off process (step S26) is not performed, and the next reel operation process (step S27) is performed.

  In the reel operation process (step S27), output settings for rotation and stop of the reel 6 are performed based on the freeze information and the reel update information that are set when the freeze effect is performed. Thereafter, a timer update process (step S28) for updating various timers is performed, and a branch process corresponding to the process number is performed (step S29).

  If the process number is “0” in step S29, the medal full switch monitoring process for monitoring whether the medal in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 is full based on the input from the medal full switch 82 (step S30). I do. If the processing number is “1” in step S29, the medal payout abnormality is monitored based on the input from the payout medal detection switch 59, and if there is an abnormality, a payout switch error command is transmitted to the effect control device 70. The payout medal detection switch error monitoring process (step S31) is performed.

  If the process number is “2” in step S29, the LED for controlling display on the game progress display unit 12, the bet number display unit 19, the credit number display unit 11, the payout number display unit 13, and the game state display unit 18. / 7-segment control processing (step S32) is performed. If the processing number is “3” in step S29, external information editing processing (step S33) for editing information to be output to an external device such as a hall computer is performed.

  After performing the process according to the process number, based on the output data set in various processes, the production control device 70, the game progress display unit 12, the bet number display unit 19, the credit number display unit 11, the payout number display unit 13 , An output process of outputting a control signal to the game state display unit 18, the medal payout device 63, the left reel motor 64a, the middle reel motor 64b, the right reel motor 64c, the external signal output terminal 33, and the like (step) S34). Then, the interrupt request is cleared (step S35), the register is restored (step S36), the interrupt is permitted (step S37), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Internal lottery processing]
FIG. 16 shows an internal lottery process in the game control process shown in FIG. Note that, during the internal lottery process, an input of various operations such as a betting operation and a reel 6 stop operation is not accepted and is invalidated. In the internal lottery process, first, a random value (random number for winning determination) is acquired from the random number generator 50e (step S41), and a winning / winning determination table (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the current gaming state is set (step 17). S42).

  Next, based on the random value acquired in step S41 and the winning winning determination table set in step S42, a winning / winning determination process (step S43) is performed for determining whether or not the internal winning has been won. In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the prize has been won internally using a random value generated by the random number generator 50e, that is, a hardware random number generated by hardware. It is not limited. For example, it can be configured to determine whether or not an internal win has been won based on a soft random number generated by software.

  Then, a loss winning flag is set (step S44), and it is determined whether or not the determination result obtained in the winning winning determination process in step S43 is a winning winning (step S45). If the determination result obtained in the winning / winning determination process is not a winning / winning (step S45; N), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step S47. If the determination result obtained in the winning winning determination process is a winning winning (step S45; Y), a winning winning flag corresponding to the internal winning is set instead of the lose winning flag set in step S44. (Step S46), the process proceeds to Step S47.

  In step S47, a lottery result command corresponding to the winning flag (losing winning flag or winning winning flag) set in step S44 or S46 is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S47). Then, stop information setting processing (step S48) for setting stop information for stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning winning flag on the active line is performed, and the internal lottery processing is terminated.

  In the stop information setting process (step S48), for example, when a winning winning flag corresponding to a special winning is carried over, other winning winning flags corresponding to a plurality of winnings are set as in the case of winning other winnings. The priority order of winning that is established when set is set. This priority is the highest in the replay winning, and is lower in the order of the small role winning other than the replay winning and the special winning (replay winning> small winning other than the replay winning> special winning). That is, the game control device 50 forms an internal lottery (internal) lottery means for determining whether or not a winning combination (winning) is won each time a game with a variable display of a plurality of variable display units (reels 6) is executed.

  FIG. 17 (a) shows the types of winning / winning determination tables according to the gaming state. In each winning determination table, the winning probability of each winning combination corresponding to the gaming state is set. Thus, for example, in RT state 1, the probability of falling replay winning, promotion replay winning and entry replay winning is higher than in normal state, or in RT state 2, the probability of winning normal replay winning is higher than in normal state. It becomes possible to raise. In addition, during the special game state, it is possible to increase the winning probability of a specific small role winning than in the normal state. FIG. 17 (b) shows the order of the degree of expectation (probability) of winning in duplicate (simultaneously) with the bonus winning (special winning) in each rare small role. The degree of expectation is the lowest for the triple D (weak watermelon) and the highest for the triple C (middle cherry).

[Freeze effect setting processing]
FIG. 18 shows a freeze effect setting process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect setting process, it is first determined whether or not the freeze effect is on standby (step S51). In the slot machine of this embodiment, there are an immediate freeze that performs a freeze effect in a game for which execution of the freeze effect is determined, and a standby freeze that performs a freeze effect in a game several games after the game for which the execution of the freeze effect is determined. Yes, when determining the execution of the freeze effect, which of the freeze effects is determined. Freezing effect standby is a state in which standby freezing is being executed.

  If it is not waiting for the freezing effect (step S51; N), the game state and the winning winning flag are acquired (step S52), and the freezing effect is executed according to the probability defined in the freezing execution determination table (see FIG. 18). A freeze effect execution lottery process (step S53) for performing the lottery is performed. Then, as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the execution of the standby freeze is determined (step S54).

  If execution of the standby freeze is determined (step S54; Y), the number of games (eg, 1, 2 or 3) until the freeze effect is generated is set in the freeze effect standby counter (step S60), and the freeze effect setting process is performed. finish. If execution of standby freeze is not determined (step S54; N), it is determined whether execution of immediate freeze is determined as a result of lottery (step S55).

  If execution of immediate freeze is not determined (step S55; N), the freeze effect setting process ends. In this case, the freeze effect is not executed. If execution of immediate freeze is determined (step S55; Y), a freeze timer corresponding to the determined freeze type is set (step S56), and a freeze effect command corresponding to the determined freeze type is set. Is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S57), and the freeze effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the freeze effect is on standby (step S51; Y), the freeze effect standby counter is updated by -1 (step S58), and it is determined whether the value of the standby counter is 0 (step S59). When the value of the standby counter is not 0 (step S59; N), that is, when the freeze effect of the standby freeze is not executed in the current game, the freeze effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the value of the standby counter is 0 (step S59; Y), that is, when the freeze effect of the standby freeze is executed in the current game, the processes of steps S56 and S57 are performed, and the freeze effect setting process is terminated. To do. As a result, when the stand-by freeze is being executed, the execution lottery for a new freeze effect is regulated. That is, the game control device 50 constitutes a freeze state generating means capable of generating a freeze state that invalidates (regulates) a predetermined operation (stop operation) for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery. .

  FIG. 19 shows the contents of the freeze execution determination table. In this freeze execution determination table, types and generation conditions of freeze effects that can be selected according to the gaming state are set. The types of immediate freeze include 5 seconds freeze effect with 5 seconds freeze time, 10 seconds freeze effect with freeze time 10 seconds, 15 seconds freeze effect with freeze time 15 seconds, freeze time There is a 60-second freeze effect of 60 seconds. The types of standby freezes include the execution of the freeze effect after 2 or 3 games after the decision to execute the freeze effect, the 60 second freeze effect after the 2nd game, the 60 second freeze effect after the 3rd game, and the execution of the freeze effect. There is a post-game operation-mediated freeze effect in which an operation-mediated freeze (so-called 0G ream) is performed after a single game. The post-game post-operation freeze effect can be generated only in the BB1 state, but may be generated in other special game states (PB state, BB2 state, and RB state).

  In the 5-second freeze effect with a freeze time of 5 seconds, the reel effect operation in which the left reel 6a is rotated at a low speed or reversely while the other reels 6b and 6 are stopped while the stop operation is invalidated at the start of the game. After 5 seconds from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed to enable a stop operation. Also, in the 10-second freeze production with a freeze time of 10 seconds, the reel production operation is performed in the same way as the 5-second freeze production from the start of the game, and the freeze state continues after 5 seconds from the start of the game. Later, a reel effect operation is performed to rotate the middle reel 6b at low speed or reverse rotation. Then, after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed, thereby enabling a stop operation.

  In the 15-second freeze effect with a freeze time of 15 seconds, the reel effect operation is the same as the 10-second freeze effect from the start of the game, and the freeze state continues after 10 seconds from the start of the game. Later, a reel effect operation is performed to rotate the right reel 6c at low speed or reverse rotation, and the movable effect device 8 is operated. Then, after 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all the reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed to enable a stop operation.

  In the 60 second freeze effect with a freeze time of 60 seconds, the reel effect operation similar to the 15 second freeze effect is performed from the start of the game, and the freeze state is continued even after 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game. Then, after 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the reel effect operation is terminated, and all reels 6 are rotated at a normal fluctuation speed, thereby enabling a stop operation.

  The 60 second freeze effect, the 2 second 60 second freeze effect, and the 3 game 60 second freeze effect are selected only when a special prize is won. In the following description, the 60-second freeze effect, the second-game 60-second freeze effect, and the 3-game 60-second freeze effect may be referred to as long freezes. In the case of the 60 second freeze effect after the second game and the 60 second freeze effect after the third game, the execution of the freeze effect is canceled if a special prize is established in the game before the freeze effect is started.

[Reel rotation start processing]
FIG. 20 shows a reel rotation start process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation start setting process, first, an inter-game wait timer value is acquired (step S61), and it is determined whether the inter-game wait timer value has become 0, that is, the time is up (step S62). The inter-game wait timer is a timer for managing a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) until the next game can be started after the start of the game, and a value corresponding to the predetermined time is set at the start of the game. In the timer update process (step S28), -1 is updated.

  Subsequent processing is waited until the inter-game wait timer value becomes 0, and when the timer value becomes 0 (step S62; Y), that is, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the previous game, It is determined whether there is a freeze execution setting which is information indicating that the freeze effect is executed in the current game (step S63). If there is no freeze execution setting (step S63; N), the reel rotation step number is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). If there is a freeze execution setting (step S63; Y), it is determined whether or not an operation-mediated freeze is present (step S64).

  If the operation-freezing is not performed (step S64; N), after the freeze time has elapsed in the normal freezing process (step S65), the number of reel rotation steps is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). The normal freeze process (step S65) stays until the freeze time elapses, starts the low speed rotation of the left reel 6a 1 second after the start of the freeze effect, and rotates the middle reel 6b at a low speed 6 seconds after the start of the freeze effect. And the process of starting the low-speed rotation of the right reel 6c is performed 11 seconds after the start of the freeze effect. That is, the game control device 50 serves as effect variation display means that can cause the variation display unit (reel 6) to perform a predetermined effect variation display (reel effect operation) while the freeze state is occurring.

  In the case of an operation-mediated freeze (step S64; Y), after the freeze time has elapsed in the operation-mediated freeze process (step S66), the reel rotation step number is set to infinite (reel rotation start is set). (Step S67). Thereafter, when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed (step S68; Y), a stop valid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S69), and the reel rotation start process is terminated. Note that instead of determining whether all reels have rotated at a constant speed (step S68), it may be monitored whether a necessary time has elapsed until the reels have rotated at a constant speed.

[Operation-mediated freeze treatment]
FIG. 21 shows an operation-mediated freeze process in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this operation-mediated freeze process, first, a reel effect operation process (step S71) is performed to effect the reel 6 in a predetermined rotation mode (low-speed rotation or reverse rotation) in the operation-mediated freeze. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an effect variation display means that allows the variation display unit to perform a predetermined effect variation display (reel effect operation) while the freeze state is occurring. And it is determined whether the intervention possible period which can accept operation of a player has started (step S72). The effect operation of the reel 6 can be continued up to eight times with one operation of 5 seconds as one set, and the intervening period is set for 4 seconds in the effect operation of the reel 6 of one set. During this intervening period, it is possible to operate the operation units that are input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17, and the reel 6 is operated by the operation, and the result of the extra replay winning is obtained. Derived effects are performed.

  If it is not this intervening period (step S72; N), the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S71). If it is the intervening period (step S72; Y), an operation prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S73). The effect control device 70 performs an effect such as performing a display prompting the operation on the image display device 3 based on the reception of the operation prompting command.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the intervening period has ended (step S74), and if the intervening period has not ended (step S74; N), input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17 is performed. It is determined whether there is an operation input based on the operation of the operation unit to be performed (step S75). When there is no operation input (step S75; N), the process returns to the determination (step S74) as to whether the intervening period has ended. Further, when there is an operation input (step S75; Y) or when the intervening period ends (step S74; Y), the continuation counter is updated by +1 (step S76), and the continuation counter is the upper limit value (8 in this case). (Step S77).

  When the continuation counter is not the upper limit value (step S77; N), a continuous lottery process (step S78) for lottery of whether to continue the reel effect operation is performed, and it is determined whether the lottery result is continuation (step S79). If the lottery result is continuation (step S79; Y), a continuation command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S80), and the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S81). The production control device 70 performs processing for stocking one AT right every time a continuation command is received. If the lottery result is not continuation (step S79; N) or the continuation counter is the upper limit value (step S77; Y), an end command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S81), and the reel effect operation is stopped. Processing is performed (step S82).

  Thereafter, an end waiting timer for measuring the remaining time of the freeze period is set (step S83), and it is determined whether the value of the end waiting timer has become 0 (step S84). A value corresponding to the remaining time of the freeze period is set in the end standby timer, and the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28). Subsequent processing is waited until the value of the end standby timer becomes 0, and when the timer value becomes 0 (step S84; Y), that is, when the freeze period is ended, the freeze end command is effect-controlled. The information is transmitted to the device 70 (step S85), and the operation intervention freeze process is terminated.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
FIG. 22 shows a reel rotation stop process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, it is first determined whether or not a stop button (reel stop button 24) has been operated (step S91). The process of step S91 is repeated until the stop button is operated. When the stop button is operated (step S91; Y), the reel stop information which is information indicating the already stopped reel 6 and its stop position is displayed. Based on this, it is checked whether or not the stop button operation is being performed on the rotating reel (step S92), and it is determined whether or not the reel stop button 24 corresponding to the rotating reel 6 has been operated (step S93).

  If the button operation is not valid (step S93; N), the process returns to step S91. If the button operation is valid (step S93; Y), the reel stop information and the stop control table corresponding to the stop button are set (step S94), and the number of steps is acquired based on the establishment flag and the reel position information. (Step S95). Then, the acquired remaining number of steps is set as reel update information (step S96). Thereby, the stop position of the reel 6 is set, and the drawing of the symbol or kicking is set. That is, the stop control of the plurality of variable display units (reels 6) is performed so that the symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation units (reel stop button 24). It becomes.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the reel that has performed the stop operation has stopped (step S97). If the reel has stopped (step S97; Y), reel stop information corresponding to the stop reel is set (step S98), and the reel stop information is set. A reel stop command corresponding to is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S99). That is, the game control device 50 serves as stop control means that can individually stop and display the plurality of reels 6 based on a stop operation during the game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the normal state (step S100). If the gaming state is in the normal state (step S100; Y), whether the bonus is being won or carried over, that is, a special prize in this game. It is determined whether or not the winning flag of the special winning prize is carried over (step S101). When the gaming state is not in the normal state (step S100; N) or when the bonus is being won / carryed over (step S101; Y), it is determined whether all reels that have been stopped are already stopped (step S108). ).

  If the bonus winning / carryover is not in progress (step S101; N), it is determined whether there is an irregular stop flag (step S102). And when there exists an irregular stop flag (step S102; Y), it transfers to step S105. When there is no irregular stop flag (step S102; N), it is determined whether the irregular stop operation has been performed (step S103). The irregular stop operation here is an operation that may cause a penalty state (a state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) in which the player is disadvantageous with respect to the occurrence of the AT state (including the ART state). The first stop operation, which is the first effective stop operation in the game, is an operation that is not for the left reel 6a.

  As will be described later, the penalty state is set by the effect control device 70. The penalty state is set when there is an irregular stopping operation and a penalty winning combination that is a winning combination that can be established by performing the irregular stopping operation (the first stop is a pushing order bell winning other than the left reel 6a, This is a case where a replay prize (a pressing order is determined) is established. That is, the production control device 70 serves as a penalty state generating means that can generate a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation.

  If it is not an irregular stop operation (step S103; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If it is an irregular stop operation (step S103; Y), the irregular operation flag is set and the continuous irregular operation counter that counts the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation is performed is updated by +1 (step S104). Then, an operation invalid timer corresponding to the continuous irregular operation counter value is set (step S105).

  FIG. 23 shows the continuous irregular operation counter value, the invalid time during which the stop operation is invalid, and the corresponding operation invalid command. Until the continuous irregular operation counter value becomes 4, the invalid time increases as the value increases, and when it is 4 or more, it is 60 seconds. That is, the invalid time increases as the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation is performed increases. As a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to continuously perform the irregular stop operation over a plurality of games, and it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally pushing the irregularity.

  Returning to FIG. 22, after setting the operation invalid timer corresponding to the continuous irregular operation counter value (step S105), the corresponding operation invalid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S106), and the value of the operation invalid timer is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S107). On the basis of the reception of the operation invalid command, the effect control device 70 performs a notification that an irregular stop operation has been performed and a notification that a penalty freeze state in which the stop operation is invalid for a predetermined period is entered. In other words, based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation, the effect control device 70 can perform predetermined notification (notification by voice, light emission, display, etc.) that can recognize that the irregular stop operation has been performed. Make.

  A value corresponding to the time for invalidating the stop operation is set in the operation invalid timer, the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28), and the value of the operation invalid timer is 0. Until then, the penalties freeze state where the next stop operation is invalidated. In this way, when the freeze state occurs based on the occurrence of an irregular stop operation (anomalous pressing), it may take extra time to end the game or attract the attention of surrounding players, and intentionally the irregular The act of pushing can be suppressed. In addition, since it can be made to feel as if it was a lottery result advantageous to a player because a freeze state generate | occur | produces, there also exists an effect of encouraging continuation of a game. In this case, the player who has generated the penalty state can digest the penalty state.

  In other words, the game control device 50 serves as an irregular stop operation determination means for determining occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order. Further, the game control device 50 constitutes a freeze state generating means capable of generating a freeze state that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation.

  When the value of the operation invalid timer becomes 0 (step S107; Y), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If the reels are not completely stopped (step S108; N), the process returns to step S91. If all reels have been stopped (step S108; Y), the irregular operation flag is cleared (step S109), and it is determined whether there has been an irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110). If the reels are all stopped (step S108; Y), a reel all stop command may be transmitted to the effect control device 70.

  If there is an irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110; Y), the reel rotation stop process is terminated. If there is no irregular stop operation in the current game (step S110; N), the continuous irregular operation counter is cleared (step S111), and the reel rotation stop processing is terminated.

  The irregular operation flag is set when an irregular stop operation is performed in one game, and is cleared when the game ends. As a result, the player can be alerted as soon as the irregular stop operation is performed, and the irregular stop operation can be suppressed. In addition, when the irregular stop operation is the first or second stop operation, a penalty freeze in which a predetermined invalid time is set after the stop operation is executed, and also after a later stop operation in the game. Penalty freeze with a predetermined invalid time is executed. Therefore, since the freeze state occurs several times in one game, the player can be fed up, and the irregular stop operation can be effectively suppressed.

  Also, the penalty state is set when there is an irregular stop operation and a penalty winning combination which is established by performing the irregular stop operation (the first stop is a push order bell other than the left reel 6a). In this case, a penalty freeze state is set based only on an irregular stop operation regardless of the occurrence of a penalty state. In this way, it is possible to always call attention to the player who has performed the irregular stop operation regardless of the penalty state.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, a plurality of stop operation units (reel stop buttons 24) provided corresponding to the respective variation display units, and a plurality of variations A lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variable display on the display unit, and depending on the result of the internal lottery based on the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation units In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variation display units so that an aspect can be derived, an irregular stop operation determination unit that determines occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order ( The game control device 50) and penalty state generating means (effect control device) capable of generating a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. 70) and freeze state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Become.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) stops the game when the stop operation for stopping the change display of the change display unit (reel 6) performed first in the game corresponds to the irregular stop operation. The freeze state is generated by invalidating the operation of the operation unit (reel stop button 24) for a predetermined period.

  In addition, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) generates a freeze state every time the second and subsequent stop operations are performed in the game.

  Further, the penalty state generating means (production control device 70) is configured to generate a penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred, and the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is the penalty state generating means. Therefore, the freeze state is generated regardless of whether or not the penalty state is generated.

  Here, generating the penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred means that the penalty state is in a case where the player has an advantage, for example, when a combination can be established by the irregular stop operation. It is to do.

  Further, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) increases the period of the freeze state as the number of consecutive games in which the irregular stop operation has occurred increases.

  Note that the penalty freeze state may be set only when a penalty state occurs. That is, the penalty freeze state may be generated only when the penalty state actually occurs, instead of unconditionally generating the penalty freeze state by the irregular stop operation.

  In addition, the penalty freeze state may be set for the first time when an irregular stop operation is performed in a plurality of consecutive (two or more arbitrarily settable times) games. This will only alert the player who appears to have performed an irregular stop operation by notification, and cause a freeze state for a player who may have intentionally performed the irregular stop operation. Is possible.

  In other words, on the basis of the occurrence of the irregular stop operation, there is provided a notification means (production control device 70) capable of performing a predetermined notification capable of recognizing that the irregular stop operation has been performed, and a freeze state generation means (game control). The device 50) may generate a freeze state based on occurrence of an irregular stop operation in a plurality of consecutive games. Here, the predetermined notification is notification performed by voice, light emission, display, or the like. Further, the term “multiple times” refers to the number of times that can be arbitrarily set at least twice.

  Further, the number of occurrences of the penalty state may be increased according to the number of occurrences of the irregular stop operation or the continuous number of games in which the irregular stop operation has occurred. Then, the invalid time in the penalty freeze state may be increased as the number of games in which the penalty state occurs is increased. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the anomaly stop operation again, and it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally pushing the anomaly.

  That is, the penalty state generating means (production control device 70) is configured to increase the number of occurrences of the penalty state every time an irregular stop operation occurs, and the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) performs the irregular stop operation. You may make it lengthen the period of a freeze state, so that the continuous frequency | count of the produced | generated game increases.

  In addition, when an irregular stop operation occurs and a winning is established, a process for slowing the payout speed may be performed. This process may be performed instead of the occurrence of the penalty freeze state, or may be performed in combination with the penalty freeze. That is, based on the occurrence of an irregular stop operation, a delay means (game control device 50) may be provided that slows the payout speed of the game medium for the established winning than the normal payout speed.

[Winning determination process]
FIG. 24 shows a winning determination process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this winning determination process, first, reel stop information, which is information indicating the stopped reel 6 and its stop position, is acquired (step S121), and winning establishment determination information according to the gaming state is set (step S122). . Next, the number of effective lines is set (step S123), the effective line to be determined is set (step S124), and it is determined whether there is a winning symbol (step S125).

  If there is no winning symbol (step S125; N), the process proceeds to step S129. If there is a winning symbol (step S125; Y), it is determined whether the winning symbol matches the winning winning flag (step S126). If they do not match (step S126; N), an unrecoverable error process (step S133) is performed, and the game control process ends. If they match (step S126; Y), it is determined whether or not a replay winning is achieved (step S127).

  When the replay winning is established (step S127; Y), the replay flag is set (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. If the replay winning is not established (step S127; N), the number of payouts corresponding to the winning symbol is added to the payout counter (step S128), and the winning determination result information is stored (step S129). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the effective lines have been determined (step S130). If not determined (step S130; N), the process returns to step S124 to determine an undecided effective line. If all the active lines have been determined (step S130; Y), it is determined whether the set payout number exceeds the maximum payout number (for example, 15) in one game (step S131).

  When the maximum number of payouts is not exceeded (step S131; N), the process proceeds to step S135. If the maximum payout number is exceeded (step S131; Y), the maximum payout number is set in the payout counter (step S132). Then, a game result command corresponding to the winning determination result information is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S135), and the winning determination process is terminated.

[Game state update processing]
FIG. 25 shows a game state update process in the game control process shown in FIG. In this game state update process, first, it is determined whether any bonus is in progress (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, or RB state) (step S141).

  If it is in any bonus state (step S141; Y), a bonus end determination process (step S152) is performed to determine whether the bonus state is to be ended (step S153). In the bonus end determination process, an end determination is made according to the type of bonus state. For example, in the PB state, it is determined that the bonus is ended when more than 20 sheets are paid out. And when not complete | finishing a bonus state (step S153; N), it transfers to step S161. When the bonus state is to be ended (step S153; Y), the normal state is set (step S154), and the process proceeds to step S161.

  On the other hand, if any bonus is not in effect (step S141; N), winning determination result information is acquired (step S142), and it is determined whether there is a bonus winning (special winning) (whether established) (step S143). . If there is a bonus winning (step S143; Y), a special gaming state (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state, RB state) corresponding to the established special winning is set (step S155), and a bonus winning flag is set. And the information regarding the standby freeze is cleared (step S156), and the process proceeds to step S161. In other words, the game control device 50 wins a special role (special prize) in the internal lottery, and generates a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. It is a special condition generation means that can.

  If there is no bonus winning (step S143; N), it is determined whether a bonus is being won (including carryover) (step S144). If a bonus is being won (step S144; Y), the normal state is set. After setting (step S154), the process proceeds to step S161. If the bonus is not being won (step S144; N), it is determined whether the normal state is in effect (step S145).

  If it is not in the normal state (step S145; N), that is, if it is in the RT state 1 or the RT state 2, the process proceeds to step S147. If it is in the normal state (step S145; Y), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S146). The establishment of the promotion condition here means that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to internal promotion for the promotion replay (special replay 1). That is, the promotion replay winning makes a predetermined start outcome that generates a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state. When this promotion condition is satisfied (step S146; Y), RT state 1 is set (step S157), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the promotion condition is not satisfied (step S146; N), it is determined whether the RT state 1 is being performed (step S147).

  If not in the RT state 1 (step S147; N), the process proceeds to step S150. If it is in the RT state 1 (step S147; Y), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S148). Satisfaction of the fall condition here means violation (when a fall fall (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order is missed (push order bell spill) ). In other words, the outcome of the fall replay prize, the outcome of the SIN prize, and the outcome of the push order bell spilling make a predetermined end outcome that ends the specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state.

  When this fall condition is satisfied (step S148; Y), the normal state is set (step S158), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S148; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S149). The establishment of the transition condition here means that a winning combination is established by deriving a symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning for the rush replay (special replay 2).

  When this transition condition is satisfied (step S149; Y), the RT state 2 is set (step S159), and the process proceeds to step S161. When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S149; N), it is determined whether the RT state 2 is being performed (step S150). And when it is not in RT state 2 (step S150; N), it transfers to step S161. If it is in the RT state 2 (step S150; Y), it is determined whether the falling condition is satisfied (step S151).

  Satisfaction of the fall condition here means violation (when a fall fall (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is in a predetermined push order is missed (push order bell spill) ). In other words, the outcome of the fall replay prize, the outcome of the SIN prize, and the outcome of the push order bell spilling make a predetermined end outcome that ends the specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state. When this fall condition is satisfied (step S151; Y), the normal state is set (step S160), and the process proceeds to step S161. If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S151; N), the winning flag other than the bonus is cleared (step S161).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has changed before and after the above process (step S162). If there is no change (step S162; N), the gaming state update process is terminated. If there is a change (step S162; Y), a gaming state command corresponding to the changed gaming state is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S163), and the gaming state update process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the gaming state transition as shown in FIG. 11 is realized. In other words, the game control device 50 generates a specific state (RT state) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until the predetermined end outcome is derived after the predetermined start outcome is derived. It is possible to generate a specific state. In addition, you may make it transfer to RT state 1 or 2 on the condition that internal winning is carried out to special prize. Further, after the special game state is ended, the state may be shifted to the RT state 1 or 2.

  Next, processing by the effect control device 70 will be described. The processing by the effect control device 70 includes an effect control process (see FIG. 26) for comprehensively controlling the effect, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, approximately every 2 msec).

[Production control processing]
FIG. 26 shows the effect control process. This effect control process is performed by reading the control program of the effect control process stored in the ROM 70b by the CPU 70a when the effect control device 70 is turned on when the slot machine 1 is turned on. Is started.

  In this effect control process, first, initialization of a register in the CPU 70a of the effect control device 70, initialization of game data stored in the RAM 70c, and power-on based on a power-on / recovery command from the game control device 50 are performed. A power-on process for performing a recovery notification process or the like is executed (step S201). Next, history information browsing processing for displaying history information of game results such as a special winning occurrence history on the image display device 3 based on a browsing operation such as the effect button 10, the reel stop button 24, or other dedicated button operations. (Step S202) is performed.

  Thereafter, a customer waiting control process (step S203) is performed for making settings related to a customer waiting notification (display of a customer waiting demo screen, demonstration light emission, etc.) based on the fact that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period. A betting number notifying process (step S204) for notifying the betting number (sound, display, light emission) is performed based on the transmitted betting number command. Then, a settlement notification control process (step S205) for notifying that the settlement has been performed based on the settlement command (sound, display, light emission) is performed, and it is determined whether the game is started (step S206). The start of the game is determined by receiving a lottery result command.

  If the game has not started (step S206; N), the process returns to the history information browsing process (step S202). When the game is started (step S206; Y), a freeze effect process (step S207) is executed to execute an effect corresponding to the freeze effect when the freeze effect is performed. Next, a game effect determination process for performing a one-time effect only for the game or a continuous notice for a plurality of games, depending on the winning of a special prize or a small role prize, the presence or absence of AT rights, and the game mode. (Step S208) is performed.

  Thereafter, a game progress control process (step S209) is performed to advance the game according to the game mode, and the AT right acquisition lottery is performed based on the penalty state, the AT right acquisition probability state (AT lottery mode), and the winning combination. The stock acquisition determination process to be performed (step S210) is performed. Then, based on the current AT lottery mode (low accuracy, high accuracy or super high accuracy) and the winning combination, the stock lottery mode transition processing (step S211) for performing the lottery transition to the AT lottery mode is performed, and the specialized mode being executed Based on the type of (specialized zone 1 or 2), the number-of-games addition process (step S212) in which the number of games that can continue the AT state is added and lottery is performed.

  Next, a continuous warning setting process (step S213) for setting a continuous warning to be performed continuously over a plurality of games is performed, and an AT warning setting process for setting a warning effect suggesting that an AT (ART) state occurs ( Step S214) is performed. Further, when the game result includes payout, payout notification setting processing (step S215) for notifying (sound, display, light emission) of payout is performed based on the payout command transmitted for each payout, and the game state command and AT An effect mode update process (step S216) for changing the effect mode based on the lottery mode is performed. Then, a history information storage process (step S217) for storing the game result as history information is performed, and the process returns to the history information browsing process (step S202).

  In addition, when a power failure occurs, a power-off process is performed to perform processing when the power failure occurs. As a process when a power failure occurs, for example, backup of information in the RAM 70c, storage of a stack pointer, checksum, and the like are performed, and then RAM access is prohibited to wait for the power to the slot machine 1 to be cut off.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 27 shows timer interrupt processing. In this timer interruption process, first, a register saving process (step S221) for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RAM 70c is performed, and an input process (step S222) for processing a signal input to the effect control device 70. To perform a security monitoring process (step S223) for performing a process corresponding to the error that has occurred.

  Next, a display control process for controlling display on the image display device 3 (step S224), an audio control process for controlling sound output from the speaker 4 (step S225), and a backlight emission process for controlling light emission of the backlight 111 (Step S226) is performed. Then, a start lever light emission process (step S227) for controlling the light emitter provided on the start lever 21, and a stop button light emission process for controlling the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24a, 24b, 24c, which are stop buttons. (Step S228), a winning line light emission process (Step S229) for controlling the winning line light emission unit 112 is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame light emission process for controlling the frame light emitting device 7 (step S230), and a random number update process for updating (for example, +1) random numbers such as an effect random number used when determining the content of the game effect (step S231). Then, an output process for outputting a control signal based on information set in various processes is performed (step S232), the interrupt request is cleared (step S233), the register is restored (step S234), and the interrupt is permitted. (Step S235), the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Freeze production process]
FIG. 28 shows a freeze effect process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether a freeze effect command has been received (step S241). If not received (step S241; N), the freeze effect process is terminated. If received (step S241; Y), the execution pattern is determined from the freeze effect pattern corresponding to the command (step S242).

  Each freeze effect has a plurality of execution patterns with different display contents as special display effects, and two types of A and B are prepared for the 5, 10 and 15 second freeze effects, and A and B are provided for the 60 second freeze effect. Four types of B, C, and D are prepared. In the case of 5, 10 and 15-second freeze production, the selection ratio varies depending on the result of the internal winning, and when the special winning is not won, the selection ratio of the A pattern is high, and the special winning is won. If so, the selection ratio of the B pattern is high. In other words, the B pattern has a higher expectation.

  Thereafter, the execution of the determined freeze effect pattern is set (step S243), and it is determined whether the type of the freeze effect is an operation-mediated freeze (step S244). If it is not an operation-mediated freeze effect (step S244; N), a normal freeze effect process (step S245) for performing an effect related to a normal freeze effect according to the determined freeze effect pattern is performed, and the freeze effect process is terminated. If it is an operation-mediated freeze effect (step S244; Y), an operation-mediated freeze effect process (step S246) for performing an effect related to the operation-mediated freeze effect is performed, and the freeze effect process is terminated. In other words, the effect control device 70 can perform a predetermined display effect during the execution of the game, and serves as a display effect means capable of performing a special display effect during the occurrence of the freeze state.

[Operation-mediated freeze production processing]
FIG. 29 shows an operation-mediated freeze effect process in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this operation-mediated freeze effect process, first, an operation prompt transmitted when an operation-intervening period during which the operation unit such as the start lever 21 and the max bet button 17 can be operated can be operated. It is determined whether a command has been received (step S251). When the operation prompting command has not been received (step S251; N), the process proceeds to step S253. When an operation prompt command is received (step S251; Y), an operation prompt notification for performing an effect such as a display for prompting the operation on the image display device 3 (for example, “tap a lever!”) Is executed. (Step S252), it is determined whether or not the continuation command transmitted when winning the lottery for the reel effect operation is received (Step S253).

  When the continuation command has not been received (step S253; N), the process proceeds to step S255. Further, when the continuation command is received (step S253; Y), a stock acquisition effect for notifying that the AT right has been acquired is executed (step S254), and the continuous lottery of the reel effect operation is not won. It is determined whether an end command transmitted when the number of continuations has reached the upper limit has been received (step S255).

  If the end command has not been received (step S255; N), the process returns to the determination (step S251) as to whether the operation prompting command has been received. If an end command has been received (step S255; Y), is the end effect being an effect indicating that the reel effect operation in the operation-mediated freeze effect has been completed (step S256), and has the freeze end command been received? Is determined (step S257). When the freeze end command is received (step S257; Y), the operation-mediated freeze effect process ends.

  Note that the number of times the end command is received and the number of continuation commands are stored. In the BB1 stock process (see FIG. 52) performed later in the game, the number of games is added to the AT number (AT right 2) stock number. The number of times of reception +1 is added.

[Game production decision processing]
FIG. 30 shows a game effect determination process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this game effect determination process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is in effect (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state or RB state) (step S261). If the bonus is being performed (step S261; Y), a bonus effect determination process (step S272) for determining an effect corresponding to the bonus is performed, and the game effect determination process is terminated. If it is not during the bonus (step S261; N), it is determined whether there is a long freeze (60-second freeze effect) (step S262).

  If there is a long freeze (step S262; Y), the execution of the bonus confirmed effect after the end of the freeze effect is set (step S273), and the game effect determining process is terminated. If there is no long freeze (step S262; N), the bonus winning winning flag is being carried over, that is, the game after the game that has been internally won for the special winning and the special winning is not established. It is determined whether or not there is (step S263).

  If the bonus winning winning flag is being carried over (step S263; Y), it is determined whether there is a setting of a continuous winning notice that is a continuous notice that can be executed when a special winning is won (step S274). When there is a setting for winning continuous notice (step S274: Y), execution of winning continuous notice is set (step S275), and the game effect determining process is terminated. Further, when the winning continuous notice is not set, that is, when the winning continuous notice is finished (step S274; N), execution of the bonus finalization effect is set (step S276), and the result of the current internal lottery is determined. It is determined whether or not the game has been won (step S277).

  If the result of the current internal lottery is a loser win (step S277; Y), the bonus type notification effect for informing the type of the winning winning flag carried over (the type of special winning that can be established) is used as the bonus finalizing effect. A plus process is performed (step S278), and the game effect determination process is terminated. If the winning combination is not lost (step S277; N), a process (step S279) of adding the winning small role notification effect for notifying the type of the small winning combination won this time to the bonus confirmed effect is performed (step S279), and the game effect determining process is performed. finish. In the winning small role notification effect, the type of the small role may not be notified, and only the fact that the small role has been won may be notified.

  On the other hand, when the bonus winning winning flag is not carried over (step S263; N), it can be executed when the special winning is not won, and the setting of the consecutive lost notice that is similar to the winning consecutive notice is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step S264). If there is a setting for continuous loss advance notice (step S264; Y), execution of continuous lost notice is set (step S265), and the process proceeds to step S270. Also, if there is no setting for continuous notice of loss (step S264; N), it is determined whether or not the pre-announcement effect indicating that the ART state is occurring is being executed (step S266). In this process (step S266), if the winning continuous effect that can be executed when the AT right is acquired in the ART state, it is determined that the precursor effect is being executed.

  When the present sign effect is being executed (step S266; Y), the execution of the present sign effect is set (step S267), and the process proceeds to step S270. Further, when the present sign effect is not being executed (step S266; N), it can be executed when the ART state does not occur, and it is determined whether or not it is a gasse sign effect similar to the present sign effect (step S268). ). In this process (step S268), it is determined that the gasse sign effect is being executed when the continuous loss effect that can be executed when the AT right cannot be acquired in the ART state is being executed.

  If the prelude effect is not being executed (step S268; N), the process proceeds to step S270. In addition, when the gasse warning effect is being executed (step S268; Y), the execution of the gasse warning effect is set (step S269), and the process proceeds to step S270. In step S270, an effect mode corresponding to the lottery result is determined from the winning effect determination table (see FIG. 31) (step S270), execution of the winning effect according to the determined effect mode is set (step S271), and the game effect is set. The decision process is terminated.

  FIG. 31 shows the contents of the winning effect determination table. The winning effect determination table determines the effect to be executed based on the result of the internal lottery and the game state. In addition, in the case of a losing, in addition to a net losing that has not been won for any winning combination, the first stop is a small winning combination other than the left reel 6a in a state where the derivation of the established small winning combination is not assisted (not AT or ART) Including the case of winning.

  Here, in the game state (game mode), the normal / precursor state is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. The continuous effect is a general term for continuous notice, continuous effect, and sign effect. The sign production includes the present sign production and the gasse sign production. In addition, as described later, the sign production is to perform the continuous production after performing the sign production and the special production, and before the sign production is the stage before performing the continuous production in the sign production, “Indication for continuous production” is a state in which a continuous production is being performed during the production of warning.

  The AT standby state is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the assist standby state ST53. During the promotion AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. The rushing AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. Further, during the extra AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the specific assist state ST55. During the relief AT is a state in which the gaming state in the effect control device 70 is the transition assist state ST54. Furthermore, during the transition chance is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the transition chance effect state ST51. That is, the normal / prediction in the game state corresponds to the normal game state ST10 in FIG. 10, and the others correspond to the specific game state ST30 in FIG.

  Moreover, the loss effect in the winning effect mode when the result is a loss is an effect that suggests and notifies that it is a loss. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and (b), the expected small role in each result suggests that there is a possibility that some small role is won, or that there is a possibility that it is a loss. This is a notification effect.

  For example, in FIG. 32A, “losing” and “bell” are displayed on the image display device 3 to indicate that there is a possibility of being lost or winning a bell winning. doing. In addition, the display of “?” Suggests a possibility other than a lose or a bell prize. In addition, in the small role expectation production, for example, when a bonus or rare small role is elected, the small role expectation production does not include the “?” Display and suggests a small role (a small role that is not missed). It also includes an effect that suggests and notifies the winning of a bonus or a rare small role due to the fact that none of them is established (so-called breaking of the law).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 32 (c) and 32 (d), the rare role expectation effect in each result indicates that there is a possibility that some rare small role has been won, and that a small role other than a rare small role has been won. It is an effect that suggests and notifies that there is a possibility of being lost or a possibility of being lost. For example, in FIG. 32 (c), by displaying “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon” on the image display device 3, the possibility of winning the Bell prize or the Cherry prize winning or watermelon that is a rare small role This suggests that you may have won the prize.

  In addition, the rare winning combination effect when the result is a rare small combination is an effect that informs that a certain rare small combination is won, as shown in FIGS. 32 (e) and 32 (f). For example, in FIG. 32 (e), the winning of the rare small combination is notified by displaying the corresponding color (purple) of the rare small combination.

  In addition, when the result is an add-on replay, the push order directing effect means that if the push order can be applied and established, the AT right will be acquired or the number of games that can be executed in the AT state will be added to the internal replay. It is an effect to notify. Since the addition replay is not established unless the pressing order is applied, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (g), an effect display that prompts the user to apply the pressing order is performed. In other words, the pushing order effect produces a predetermined chance effect that is executed in a game in which the right to execute assist information may be stored, and the effect control device 70 executes the predetermined chance effect. The chance production execution means that can be performed.

  This push order effect is prohibited from being executed during the continuous production, such as during the continuous notice or the continuous production during the warning. As a result, continuous production is interrupted, and the expectation for winning the special prize is prevented from being attenuated.

  In addition, the push order effect is prohibited from being executed even during the transition chance. During the transition chance, that is, the transition chance state ST31, the transition is made when the specified number of games is consumed in the ART state ST35 and there is no AT right stock. That is, this is a case where the ART state advantageous to the player is finished and the RT state is reached. If a new AT right can be acquired in this state, it is possible to return to the ART state. However, the possibility of acquiring the AT right is not so high, and most of them fall to the normal gaming state ST10.

  If an effect that excessively expresses the player's expectation, such as a push order effect, is given during this transition chance, the player's discouragement will increase when the player falls into a normal state. Therefore, during the transition chance that is a specific state (RT state) after the notification of the assist information is finished, a predetermined chance effect such as a push order effect is not performed, and the player who has fallen into a normal game I try to reduce my disappointment and loss. This also has the advantage that the game can proceed smoothly. In addition, when it is not during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), it is a case where the original gaming state ST10 or the fall to the normal gaming state ST10 is not close, and discouraged even if the AT right cannot be acquired. The feeling of loss is not so great, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by effectively giving the player's expectation by executing a predetermined chance effect.

  In addition, even if it is during the transition chance, when the AT right acquisition is confirmed, a predetermined confirmed effect is executed. For example, when the single winning combination C (middle stage cherry) is won (when it is not won in duplicate with the BB winning), the acquisition of the AT right is confirmed, and in this case, the acquisition of the AT right is definitely notified. The finalized effect is performed in the game or the subsequent game. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or in a subsequent game. Thereby, even if it is during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the predetermined confirmed effect will be executed. The execution of the freeze effect when winning the middle cherries may be performed only in the case of single winning. In addition, when a rare small role is elected alone (when not overlapping with a BB prize), and when winning an AT right acquisition lottery, a predetermined finalization effect is provided for definite notification of AT right acquisition. May be performed.

  Further, as described later, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), the sign effect that is executed over a plurality of games to notify that the AT right may be stored, that is, the assist information The predetermined chance effect that is executed in a game after the game that may store the execution right for informing is also not executed. This also reduces the disappointment and loss of the player when falling to normal games. In addition, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), even if it is a case where a rare small role with the possibility of storing the AT right is won, an effect of suggesting and notifying the winning is not performed. good.

  It should be noted that the predetermined chance effect can be executed basically when the transition chance is not in progress (transition chance state ST31), but even if the game state capable of executing the predetermined chance effect is set in more detail. good. For example, a predetermined chance effect may be executable in the normal state and the ART state, which is neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, or in the normal state or the ART state. It may be possible to execute the chance production.

  In addition, during the execution of continuous effects such as continuous announcements, continuous effects, and pre-annual continuous effects in the normal and ART states that are neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, a predetermined chance is given. Execution of the performance may be prohibited, or execution of a predetermined chance effect during execution of continuous performance such as continuous notice in the normal state or ART state, continuous performance, or continuous performance during the warning In these cases, execution of the predetermined chance effect may be prohibited only in the case of continuous notice, and the predetermined chance effect may be executed in the continuous effect or the pre-signed continuous effect.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display, When a game corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived as a result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation, the slot machine where the winning of the winning combination is established has a predetermined start Specific state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until a predetermined end result is derived from Assist information notifying means (production control device 70) capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined acquisition condition The execution right storage means (production control device 70) capable of storing the execution right for causing the assist information notification means to notify the assist information based on the fact that the execution information is established, and the execution right can be stored. A chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined chance effect in a game with or after the game, and the assist information notifying means for deriving at least the starting point The assist information and the assist information for avoiding derivation of the end event are notified, and the chance effect executing means is in a specific state after the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the notification of the assist information by the assist information notifying means is ended. This means that the predetermined chance effect is not executed.

  Here, a game in which the execution right may be memorized is, for example, when an internal winning is made for a specific combination, and when the execution right can be acquired with a predetermined probability, the specific winning is internally won It is a game. “Execution rights can be acquired with a predetermined probability” includes a case where acquisition is determined based on a lottery result or a case where the execution right can be acquired by applying a pushing order. In addition, the predetermined chance effect is an effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the execution right for notifying the assist information may be stored. For example, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop operation mode (push order). This is an effect that urges the player to consider the pressing order when the execution right can be acquired.

  Further, the chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) executes a predetermined chance effect in the normal state and / or in the specific state where the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is being executed. It will be like that.

  Also, a special state generating means (game control) capable of generating a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special role is won in the internal lottery and the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. Device 50), and a continuous advance notice that can be performed across multiple games based on winning a special role or an overlapping target role that may be won in duplicate in the internal lottery. Notice execution means (effect control device 70), and the chance effect execution means (effect control device 70) is in a normal state and / or is notified of assist information by the assist information notification means (effect control device 70). Even in the specific state, when the continuous notice is being executed, the predetermined chance effect is not executed.

  In addition, the game includes a confirmed effect executing means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which execution rights are determined to be stored or a game thereafter, and the confirmed effect executing means includes assist information. Even in the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the notification means (the effect control device 70) ends, the predetermined confirmed effect is executed.

[Game progress control processing]
FIG. 33 shows a game progress control process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this game progress control process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is being won (carryover), that is, whether a special win has been won or a special win flag has been carried over (step S281). If the bonus is being won (carryover) (step S281; Y), a bonus internal intermediate process (step S282) is performed, and the game progress control process is terminated. If the bonus is not won (carryover) (step S281; N), the process selected in the branch process (step S283) in the game mode is performed, and the game progress control process is terminated.

  When the game mode is normal / precursor (non-assist state ST50 or precursor game state ST52), normal / precursor processing (step S284) is performed. If the game mode is AT standby (assist standby state ST53), AT standby processing (step S285) is performed. When the game mode is in the promotion AT / rushing in (transition assist state ST54), the promotion / rushing in process (step S286) is performed.

  If the game mode is in the extra AT (specific assist state ST55), the extra AT processing (step S287) is performed. When the game mode is in the repair AT (relief AT state ST32), the repair AT process (step S288) is performed. If the game mode is during the transition chance (transition chance presentation state ST51), the transition chance processing (step S289) is performed.

  Further, when the game mode is in the PB state, a process during PB (step S290) is performed. If the game mode is in the BB1 state, a process during BB1 (step S291) is performed. If the game mode is in the BB2 state, a process during BB2 (step S292) is performed. If the game mode is in the RB state, RB processing (step S293) is performed. In the case of the game mode in these special game states, an effect process corresponding to each special game state is performed. It should be noted that the penalty state (the state in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed) is generated based on the irregular stop operation only when the game mode is the normal / predictive game mode corresponding to the normal game state ST10. It has become.

[Bonus internal processing]
FIG. 34 shows a bonus internal intermediate process in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this bonus internal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current game is a bonus winning game that is a game that has been won internally for a special prize (step S301). If it is not a bonus winning game (step S301; N), the process proceeds to step S303. If the game is a bonus winning game (step S301; Y), the execution information of the AT sign effect (the main sign effect and the gasse sign effect) is cleared (step S302). Thereby, the execution of the precursor effect is stopped.

  Then, the execution of the game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) using the determined effect pattern is started (step S303), and a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received. Is determined (step S304). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S304; N), the process proceeds to step S307. When the reel stop command is received (step S304; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S305), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S306). It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received (step S307).

  If no game result command has been received (step S307; N), the process returns to step S304. If a game result command is received (step S307; Y), it is determined whether a bonus prize (special prize) has been established (step S308). If the bonus winning is not established (step S308; N), the bonus internal processing is terminated. If a bonus winning is established (step S308; Y), the start of a bonus state (PB state, BB1 state, BB2 state or RB state) corresponding to the type of bonus won is set (step S309), and the bonus is set. End internal processing.

[Normal / predictive treatment]
FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 show the normal / precursor processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this normal / precursor processing, first, execution of a determined game effect (continuous notice, book, gasse predictor effect, small role expectation effect, etc.) is started (step S311), and it is determined whether a reel stop command has been received. (Step S312).

  When the reel stop command is received (step S312; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S313), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S314). In other words, the effect control device 70 performs a game effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and serves as a game effect means capable of advancing the game effect according to a stop operation.

  Then, it is determined whether the current stop operation is an irregular stop operation (step S315). The irregular stop operation here is an operation in which the first stop operation is not the left reel 6a. If the current stop operation is not an irregular stop operation (step S315; N), the process proceeds to step S319. If it is an irregular stop operation (step S315; Y), a penalty flag is set (step S316), and an output of a warning sound is set (step S317). Then, the progress of the effect display is stopped (step S318), and it is determined whether an operation invalidation command including information related to the penalty freeze state is received (step S319). As described above, the penalty freeze state is set when the irregular stop operation occurs, but in this case, the progress of the game effect is stopped. Thereby, the penalty freeze state is made boring, and the suppression effect of the irregular stop operation is enhanced.

  As described above, the game effect means includes a game effect means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a game effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and advancing the game effect according to a stop operation. When a freeze state (penalty freeze state) occurs during the game, the progress of the game effect is stopped.

  When the operation invalid command has not been received (step S319; N), the process proceeds to step S326. If an operation invalid command is received (step S319; Y), an invalid timer corresponding to the command is set (step S320), and a remaining invalid time display corresponding to the invalid timer is set (step S321). Thereafter, warning notification (display, light emission) is set (step S322), the remaining invalid time display is updated based on the invalid timer (step S323), and it is determined whether the invalid timer has become 0 (step S324).

  The invalid timer is set to a value corresponding to the time during which the stop operation is invalidated in the game control device 50, and the value is updated by -1 for each timer interrupt process, and the invalid timer value becomes zero. Until then, the penalties freeze state where the next stop operation is invalid. In the penalty freeze state, a notification by displaying a warning display or a remaining invalid time display on the image display device 3 or a notification by causing the frame light emitting device 7 to emit light is performed. Note that the warning display and the light emission mode may be changed each time the warning notification is set. Further, based on the reception of the operation invalidation command, one or both of the main effect (such as an effect suggesting the probability state of the AT lottery) and the notice effect (such as an effect suggesting the small role winning) may be stopped.

  If the invalid timer becomes 0 (step S324; Y), the remaining invalid time display and warning notification are cleared (step S325), and it is determined whether a game result command has been received (step S326). If no game result command has been received (step S326; N), the process returns to step S312. If a game result command is received (step S326; Y), it is determined whether there is a penalty flag (step S327).

  If there is a penalty flag (step S327; Y), it is determined whether a penalty target winning combination has been established (step S328). The penalty target winning combination is a winning combination that can be established by performing an irregular stopping operation. For example, the first stop is a pushing order bell winning other than the left reel 6a or a replay winning in which the pushing order is determined. When this penalty target winning combination has not been established (step S328; N), the process proceeds to step S332. If a penalty target winning combination is established (step S328; Y), a penalty state is set (step S329), and the number of penalty games corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S330).

  That is, a penalty state is set in which an AT right acquisition lottery is not performed for a predetermined game when an irregular stopping operation is performed and a player becomes advantageous, such as when a winning is achieved. Further, the number of penalty games, which is the number of games for which a penalty state is set, is set according to the winning combination, for example, set according to the degree of advantage of the player by the irregular stop operation, The number of penalty games is larger when the push order bell is established than when the replay winning with the push order is established.

  Thereafter, the various consecutive winning / winning counters are cleared (step S331), the penalty flag is cleared (step S332), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S337). The continuous winning counter counts the number of consecutive winnings of the rare small role, and the AT right is given according to the number of consecutive winnings. In addition, the consecutive winning counter counts the number of consecutive bell winnings, and the AT right is given according to the number of consecutive winnings. Clearing these counters also imposes a penalty of delaying the granting of benefits to players.

  In other words, the production control device 70 serves as an irregular stop operation determination unit that determines the occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which the stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) is operated in a predetermined irregular operation order. Further, the effect control device 70 serves as a penalty state generating means capable of generating a penalty state that is disadvantageous to the player over a plurality of games based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. The penalty state generating means is configured to generate a penalty state based on the result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred.

  On the other hand, when there is no penalty flag (step S327; N), it is determined whether it is in the penalty state (step S333), and when it is not in the penalty state (step S333; N), the process proceeds to step S337. If it is in the penalty state (step S333; Y), the penalty game number is decremented by 1 (step S334), and it is determined whether the penalty game number is 0 (step S335).

  When the number of penalty games is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, when the penalty state is set even in the next game, the process proceeds to step S337. When the number of penalty games becomes 0 (step S335; Y), the penalty state is canceled and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S337).

  In the determination of whether or not the transition condition is satisfied (step S337), it is determined whether or not the promotion replay winning is satisfied as the transition condition is satisfied. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S337; Y), the start of the transition chance state is set (step S344), and the normal / precursor processing is terminated. As a result, from the next game, the gaming control device 50 becomes the RT state 1ST41, and the effect control device 70 becomes the transition chance effect state ST51, and the gaming state becomes the transition chance state ST31. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S337; N), it is determined whether or not the sign effect is being performed (step S338). Then, when the present sign production is being performed (step S338; Y), the number of sign games is updated by -1 (step S339), and it is determined whether the number of sign games has become 0 (step S340). When the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S340; N), the normal / precursor processing is terminated. When the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S340; Y), the start of the assist standby state is set (step S341), and the normal / precursor processing is terminated. Thereby, the assist standby state ST53 is entered from the next game. The effect display is switched to the effect display corresponding to the assist standby state ST53 based on the bet operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the present sign production (step S338; N), it is determined whether it is in the gas sign production (step S342). When the warning sign is not in progress (step S342; N), the normal / predictor process is terminated. In addition, when it is in the predicament (step S342; Y), the number of precursor games is updated by -1 (step S343), and the normal / predictor processing is terminated.

  The penalty state may be set regardless of whether or not a penalty target winning combination has been established. Also, the number of penalty games may be constant regardless of the type of winning prize. Further, when setting the number of penalty games, the number of occurrences of the irregular stop operation may be taken into account. For example, a predetermined number of penalty games may be added for each occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Also, the number of precursor games is subtracted even in the penalty state so that the number of precursor games does not change, but the number of precursor games is reset to a longer game number in accordance with the penalty state setting. Also good.

  FIGS. 37 and 38 show an example in which a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation mode is performed and an irregular stop operation is performed when the game mode is normal / a precursor. As shown in FIG. 37A, when a betting operation is performed and the start lever 21 is operated, the game is started and the rotation of the reel is started. As the game starts, an effect display is displayed on the image display device 3. Here, an effect that changes stepwise with the stop of the reel is set, and an effect image display STEP1 that is an effect display of the first stage is displayed. The stop operation is disabled from the start of rotation of the reel 6 until the reel 6 is rotated at a constant speed that rotates at a predetermined rotation speed. In this state, the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24 is in an invalid notification lighting state indicating that the stop operation is invalid.

  After that, when all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, a stop valid command indicating that the stop operation is possible is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and as shown in FIG. The stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24 is in an effective notification lighting state indicating that a stop operation is possible.

  When the player operates the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a as the first stop operation, the rotation of the left reel 6a is stopped as shown in FIG. This stop operation is a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation. At this time, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. Based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb!) Is output, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a is in an invalid notification lighting state. Further, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP2 which is the second stage effect display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b is operated as the second stop operation while the right and left reels 6b and 6c are rotated, the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) is obtained. As shown, the rotation of the middle reel 6b is stopped. This stop operation is a normal operation that is not an irregular stop operation. In the slot machine of the present embodiment, if the left reel 6a is stopped as the first stop operation, the normal operation is performed even if the right reel 6c is stopped as the second stop operation.

  In response to the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70. Based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb!) Is output, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b is set in the invalid notification lighting state. Furthermore, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP3 which is the effect display of the third stage.

  Thereafter, when the reel stop button 24c corresponding to the right reel 6c is operated as the third stop operation, the rotation of the right reel 6c is stopped. Along with this stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and based on this, a normal stop operation sound (for example, bomb !!) is output and the right reel is output. The stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24c corresponding to 6c is in an invalid notification lighting state. Further, the effect display of the image display device 3 is changed to effect image display STEP4 which is the effect display of the fourth stage. When a winning is established, the corresponding payout or game state transition is performed, and the game ends.

  On the other hand, when the reel stop buttons 24b and 24c other than the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a are operated as the first stop operation, an irregular stop operation is performed. FIG. 37D shows an example in which the player operates the reel stop button 24c corresponding to the right reel 6c as the first stop operation to stop the rotation of the right reel 6c. The penalty freeze state is started based on this irregular stop operation, and the next stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined invalid time (here, 20 seconds).

  Along with the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs processing corresponding to the irregular stop operation. As this process, first, a warning stop operation sound (for example, bu ~!) Is output in response to the stop operation. In addition, all the stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are set to the invalid notification lighting state. In addition, the effect display of the image display device 3 is in a dark state where the progress is stopped and the brightness is lowered while the effect display is in the first stage. It should be noted that the display may be any display that makes it difficult to recognize the effect display, such as displaying the color lightly, even in the dark state. Moreover, it is good also as just stopping the progress of effect display, without setting it as a dark state. Further, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the front of the effect display. The warning display 91 notifies that the left reel 6a must be stopped as the first stop.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38C, a remaining invalid time display 92 is performed instead of the warning display 91. In addition, a warning sound (for example, bu ~!) Is continuously output during a period in which the penalty is frozen. When the invalid time in the penalty freeze state ends, the second stop operation can be performed as shown in FIG. 38D, and the stop provided on the reel stop buttons 24a and 24b corresponding to the rotating reels 6a and 6b. The button LED 66 is in an effective notification lighting state. Also, the output of the warning sound (for example, bu ~ !!!!) ends. Note that the warning sound may be continuously output. Even in this state, the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), when the player operates the reel stop button 24a corresponding to the left reel 6a as the second stop operation, the penalty freeze state is started again, and a predetermined invalid time (here, 20). The next stop operation is invalidated for 2 seconds).

  In response to the stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs the process corresponding to the irregular stop operation again. As this processing, a warning stop operation sound (for example, buzz!) Is output in response to the stop operation, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the effect display, and then the remaining invalid time display 92 is performed. . In addition, all the stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are set to the invalid notification lighting state. In addition, a warning sound (for example, buzz!) Is continuously output until the end of the invalid time. Note that the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  Thereafter, when the invalid time in the penalty freeze state is over, the third stop operation is possible, and the stop button LED 66 provided on the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the rotating reel 6b is in an effective notification lighting state. In addition, the output of the warning sound ends. In this state as well, as in the state shown in FIG. 38 (d), the effect display on the image display device 3 is in a state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed. It remains in a dark state with reduced brightness.

  Then, when the player operates the reel stop button 24b corresponding to the middle reel 6b as the third stop operation, the penalty freeze state is started again, and the next game starts for a predetermined invalid time (here, 20 seconds). Operations (betting operations and operations of the start lever 21) are invalidated.

  Also, with the third stop operation, a reel stop command corresponding to the stop operation is transmitted from the game control device 50 to the effect control device 70, and the effect control device 70 also performs the process corresponding to the irregular stop operation again. As this processing, a warning stop operation sound (for example, buzz!) Is output in response to the stop operation, a warning display 91 is performed so as to overlap the effect display, and then the remaining invalid time display 92 is performed. . It should be noted that all stop button LEDs 66 provided on the reel stop buttons 24 corresponding to the reels 6 are in an invalid notification lighting state. In addition, a warning sound (for example, buzz!) Is continuously output until the end of the invalid time. Note that the effect display of the image display device 3 is kept in the state where the progress is stopped with the effect display at the first stage at the time when the irregular stop operation is performed, and in the dark state where the brightness is lowered.

  When the invalid time elapses, the next game can be started. As a result of the game in which the irregular stop operation has occurred, a penalty winning combination which is a winning combination that can be established by performing the irregular stop operation (the first stop is a push order bell prize other than the left reel 6a or a pushing order is determined). When a replay winning) is established, a penalty state is set in which the AT right acquisition lottery is not performed for a predetermined number of games.

[AT standby processing]
FIG. 39 shows AT standby processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this AT standby processing, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S351), and transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped. It is determined whether a reel stop command has been received (step S352). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S352; N), the process proceeds to step S355. When the reel stop command is received (step S352; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S353), and the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354). It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received (step S355).

  If no game result command has been received (step S355; N), the process returns to step S352. If a game result command has been received (step S355; Y), it is determined whether or not a push order has been missed (step S356). When the push order bell is missed (step S356; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S360), and the AT standby process is terminated. As a result, the transition assist state ST54 is entered from the next game, and provision of information for assisting establishment of the selected small role (for example, notification of the pressing order) is started. The effect display is switched to the effect display corresponding to the transition assist state ST54 based on the betting operation for the next game. In other words, the occurrence of the pushing order bell missing here satisfies the start condition for starting the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  If the push order bell has not been missed (step S356; N), it is determined whether the falling condition is satisfied (step S357). The falling condition here is establishment of a falling replay (special replay 3) winning or a SIN winning. If the fall condition is not satisfied (step S357; N), the AT standby process is terminated. If the fall condition is satisfied (step S357; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S358), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S359), and AT waiting processing is performed. finish.

  Thereby, in the game control device 50, the normal state ST40 remains unchanged, but from the next game, the effect control device 70 changes to the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52, and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50.

  Here, the game shifts to the assist standby state ST53 as the precursor game is exhausted, and shifts to the promoted / rushing AT state (transition assist state ST54) when the push order bell is lost. Alternatively, when the precursor game is consumed, the state may be shifted directly to the promoted / rushing AT state.

[Promotion / Processing during rushing AT]
FIG. 40 shows a process during promotion / rush-in AT in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this process during promotion / rush-in AT, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S371), and whether or not the assist target role is won is determined. Determination is made (step S372). If the winning combination is not won (step S372; N), the process proceeds to step S374. If the winning combination is won (step S372; Y), the display of an operation assist image that is advantageous to the player is set (step S373).

  The assist target combination is a push order bell prize, a promotion replay prize, a rush replay prize, a fall replay prize, and a SIN prize. The operation assist image that is advantageous to the player includes a push order and a stop pattern to be aimed at which can avoid the establishment of the push order bell prize, the promotion replay prize and the rush replay prize, the SIN prize and the fall replay prize. It is an image to notify. Since the promotion replay winning and the fall replay winning are duplicated, it is possible to assist the avoidance of the falling replay winning by assisting the establishment of the promotion replay winning.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S374). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S374; N), the process proceeds to step S379. If the reel stop command is received (step S374; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S375), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S376).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. If there is an assist violation (step S376; Y), a warning sound output and a warning image display are set (step S377), and it is determined whether a game result command including information on a winning determination result has been received. (Step S379). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. If there is no assist violation (step S376; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S378), and the prize is won. It is determined whether a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S379).

  If no game result command has been received (step S379; N), the process returns to step S374. If a game result command is received (step S379; Y), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S380). The establishment of the promotion condition here means establishment of a promotion replay prize. If this promotion condition is satisfied (step S380; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S381), and the promotion / rush-in process is terminated. Thereby, although the game state in the production control device 70 does not change, the game control device 50 makes a transition to the RT state 1 and enters the ART standby state ST33 from the next game. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, when the promotion condition is not satisfied (step S380; N), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S382). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill). If this fall condition is satisfied (step S382; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S386), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S387), and the process during promotion / rush-in AT Exit.

  Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the normal state ST40, but in the next game, the presentation control device 70 provides information for assisting the establishment of the winning small role in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. (For example, the notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, establishment of the fall condition here establishes an end condition for ending the notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S382; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S383). The establishment of the transition condition here means establishment of a rush replay winning. If this transition condition is not satisfied (step S383; N), the process during promotion / rush-in is terminated. If the transition condition is satisfied (step S383; Y), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter that manages the number of games that can be executed in the ART state ST35 (step S384), and corresponds to the AT right stock content. The start of the additional AT state to be set is set (step S385), and the process during promotion / rush-in AT is terminated.

  As a result, from the next game, the game control device 50 enters the RT state 2ST42, and the effect control device 70 enters the specific assist state ST55, and the game state becomes the ART state ST35. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. Note that, depending on the type of AT right that is the earliest stock right among the stocked AT rights, the game number fixed assist state ST55a, that is, the ART state 1ST35a, and the game number variable assist state ST55b, that is, the ART state 2ST35b. It becomes. It should be noted that the game state to be transferred may be selected depending on the type of AT replay winning that has been established (middle or naname) instead of the type of AT right.

  FIG. 41 shows an example of the operation assist image. 41A to 41C show operation assist images for assisting establishment of the promotion replay winning (avoidance of falling replay winning). When the game is started, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the image display device 3 displays the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by the figure. Here, the case where the pressing order is the order of left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that the promotion replay winning is established by the diamond shape. Furthermore, the types of winnings that are established by voice (here, Kyupin!) Are also shown.

  When the player performs an operation to stop the left reel 6a as the first stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the display corresponding to the stopped left reel 6a is darkened as shown in FIG. Furthermore, when the player performs an operation to stop the middle reel 6b as the second stop operation in accordance with the instruction of the operation assist image, the display corresponding to the stopped middle reel 6b is darkened as shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation that does not follow the instructions on the operation assist image (when there is an assist violation), a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the game effect and the operation assist image are updated. Is stopped.

  FIGS. 41D to 41F show operation assist images for assisting the establishment of the rush replay winning. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by figures are displayed on the image display device 3. Here, a case where the pressing order is left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that a rush replay winning is established by a square figure. Furthermore, the type of winning that is established by voice (in this case, JOW!) Is shown.

  When the player performs the stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated in the same manner as in the case of the promotion replay winning as shown in FIGS. 41 (e) and 41 (f). Similarly, when there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  FIGS. 41 (g) to (i) show operation assist images for assisting in avoiding establishment of the SIN prize. In this case, the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, and the right reel 6c is instructed to aim at “7”. When the player performs a stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated, and the assist display corresponding to the stopped reel is erased. When there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  FIGS. 41 (j) to (l) show operation assist images for assisting the establishment of the pushing order bell winning. Also in this case, as in the case of the promotion replay winning, as shown in FIG. 41 (j), the push order indicated by numerals and the type of winning established indicated by the figure are displayed on the image display device 3. Here, the case where the pressing order is the order of left, middle, and right is shown, and it is shown that the pressing order bell winning is established by a circular figure.

  When the player performs a stop operation according to the instruction of the operation assist image, the operation assist image is updated in the same manner as in the case of the promotion replay winning as shown in FIGS. 41 (k) and (l). Similarly, when there is an assist violation, a warning sound is output and a warning image is displayed, and the update of the game effect and the operation assist image is stopped.

  Note that during the ART state ST35, the operation assist image is the same image as the operation assist image that assists the establishment of the push order bell prize even when assisting the establishment of the promotion replay prize and the rush replay prize. Further, even in a state where information for assisting the establishment of the winning prize is not notified (for example, the normal gaming state ST10), an operation assist image for assisting establishment of the push order bell prize may be displayed with a low probability. .

[Additional processing during AT]
FIG. 42 shows the extra AT processing in the game progress control processing shown in FIG. In this extra AT processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the specialized zone (step S391). The special zones are a special zone 1ST55b1 and a special zone 2ST55b2 in the game number variable assist state ST55b. If it is the special zone (step S391; Y), the special zone medium process (step S393) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S394. If the zone is not a specialized zone (step S391; N), execution of the game production (freeze production, rare role expectation production, continuous notice, etc.) using the decided production pattern is started (step S392), It is determined whether or not the winning is made (step S394).

  If the winning combination is not won (step S394; N), the process proceeds to step S396. If the winning combination is won (step S394; Y), an operation assist image display that is advantageous to the player is set (step S395). Note that the operation assist image that is advantageous to the assist target role and the player is the same as the processing during the promotion / rush-in AT, and an additional replay winning is added as the assist target role, and the push assist effect as the corresponding operation assist image (See FIG. 32 (g)).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S396). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S396; N), the process proceeds to step S401. If the reel stop command is received (step S396; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S397), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S398).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. If there is an assist violation (step S398; Y), the output of the warning sound and the display of the warning image are set (step S399), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result of winning is received. (Step S401). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. When there is no assist violation (step S398; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S400), and the prize is won. It is determined whether a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S401).

  If no game result command has been received (step S401; N), the process returns to step S396. If a game result command is received (step S401; Y), the AT game number counter is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S403). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

  If this fall condition is satisfied (step S403; Y), it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S409). If the value of the AT game number counter is not 0 (step S409; N), the start of the rescue AT state is set (step S410), and the process during the addition AT is terminated. When the fall condition is satisfied, the game control device 50 is in the normal state ST40, and the effect control device 70 is in the transition assist state ST54 because the AT game number counter is not 0, and the game state from the next game becomes the relief AT state ST32. Further, the effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  On the other hand, if the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S409; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S411), and the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S412). Add-on AT processing is terminated. As the fall condition is established, the game control device 50 is in the normal state ST40, and in the effect control device 70, since the AT game number counter is 0, the assist role is established in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52. The provision of information to be performed (for example, notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state from the next game becomes the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, when the fall condition here is satisfied and the value of the AT game number counter is 0, the end condition for terminating the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is satisfied.

  If the fall condition is not satisfied (step S403; N), it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S404). If it is not 0 (step S404; N), an additional AT is being performed. The process ends. When the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S404; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S405), and it is determined whether the AT right stock is 0 (step S406). ).

  If the AT right stock is not 0 (step S406; N), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S407), and the process during the addition AT is terminated. Thereby, in the game control device 50, the RT state 2 remains unchanged, but in the effect control device 70, the transition assist state ST54 is entered, and the game state from the next game becomes the ART standby state ST33. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is 0 (step S406; Y), the start of the transition chance state is set (step S408), and the extra AT processing is terminated. Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the RT state 2, but in the production control device 70, provision of information for assisting the establishment of the winning small role in the transition chance production state ST51 is provided (for example, notification of pushing order). Is completed, and the gaming state from the next game becomes the transition chance state ST31. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. That is, when the AT game number counter value is 0 and the AT right stock is 0, an end condition for ending notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is established.

[Specialized zone processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special zone processing in the extra AT processing shown in FIG. In this special zone processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the special zone 1 (ST55b1) (step S421). If it is the special zone 1 (step S421; Y), an additional number determination process 1 (step S422) for determining the additional number is performed, and the additional number is added to the AT game number counter to set the execution of the additional effect. (Step S423).

  Then, the number of zone games is updated by -1 (step S424), and it is determined whether the number of zone games is 0 (step S425). If the number of zone games is not 0 (step S425; N), the special zone processing is terminated. In this case, the special zone 1ST55b1 continues in the next game. If the number of zone games is 0 (step S425; Y), execution of the special zone end effect is set (step S426), and the special zone processing is ended. In this case, the normal game zone ST55b0 is entered from the next game.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the special zone 1 (step S421; N), it is determined whether it is in the special zone 2 (ST55b2) (step S427). If it is not the special zone 2 (step S427; N), the special zone processing is terminated. If it is the special zone 2 (step S427; Y), an additional number determination process 2 (step S428) for determining the additional number is performed, and the additional number is added to the AT game number counter to execute the additional effect. Set (step S429).

  Then, the special zone continuous lottery is performed (step S430), and it is determined whether the lottery result is non-continuation of the special zone (step S431). When the lottery result is not the continuation of the special zone (step S431; N), the special zone process is terminated. In this case, the special zone 2ST55b2 continues in the next game. If the lottery result is a non-continuation of the special zone (step S431; Y), the execution of the special zone end effect is set (step S426), and the special zone processing is terminated. In this case, the normal game zone ST55b0 is entered from the next game.

  In the additional number determination process 1 (step S422), the additional number is determined according to the selection rate shown in FIG. Further, in the additional number determination process 2 (step S428), the additional number is determined according to the selection rate shown in FIG. At this time, the additional number may be selected so that the selection rate shown in FIG. 44 (a) or (b) is obtained by a random number for determining the additional number, or the additional number corresponding to the internal winning winning combination is added. The selection rate shown in FIG. 44 (a) or (b) may be obtained by determining the number. When determining the number of extras corresponding to the internal winning combination, one additional number may correspond to one winning combination, or multiple additional numbers may correspond to one winning combination, May be selected. In this case, it is preferable that the expected value of the additional number increases as the winning combination has a lower winning probability. Also, 0 may be set for the number of additions, and in the specialization zone 2ST55b2, it may be set as a non-continuation condition that 0 is selected for the number of additions instead of the continuous lottery.

[Relief AT processing]
FIG. 45 shows a process during repair AT in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In the processing during the relief AT, first, execution of the game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S441), and it is determined whether or not the assist target role is won. (Step S442).

  If the winning combination is not won (step S442; N), the process proceeds to step S444. If the winning combination is selected (step S442; Y), an operation assist image display that is advantageous to the player is set (step S443). Note that the operation assist image that is advantageous to the assist target combination and the player is the same as the processing during the promotion / rush-in AT.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether a reel stop command transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped is received (step S444). If the reel stop command has not been received (step S444; N), the process proceeds to step S449. When the reel stop command is received (step S444; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S445), and it is determined whether there is an assist violation (step S446).

  The assist violation means that the player performs an operation ignoring the pressing order notified by the operation assist image and the target stop symbol. When there is an assist violation (step S446; Y), the output of the warning sound and the display of the warning image are set (step S447), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the winning determination result has been received. (Step S449). The warning sound is output and the warning image is displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. Furthermore, the game effect and the update of the operation assist image are also stopped. If there is no assist violation (step S446; N), the effect (game effect (G effect) or operation assist image (AT image)) being executed is updated based on the reel stop information (step S448), and the prize is won. It is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result is received (step S449).

  If no game result command has been received (step S449; N), the process returns to step S444. If a game result command is received (step S449; Y), the AT game number counter is updated by -1 (step S450), and it is determined whether the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S451). If the value of the AT game number counter is not 0 (step S451; N), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S452). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

  When the value of the AT game number counter is 0 (step S451; Y) or when the fall condition is satisfied (step S452; Y), the AT right stock is updated by -1 (step S453), and the normal / precursor state Is set (step S454), and the process during the repair AT is ended. Thereby, in the game control device 50, there is no change in the normal state ST40, but in the effect control device 70, since the AT game number counter is 0, the small role won in the non-assist state ST50 or the precursor game state ST52 is won. The provision of information for assisting establishment (for example, notification of the pressing order) ends, and the gaming state changes from the next game to the normal gaming state ST10. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the AT right stock is not 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the game proceeds to the precursor game state ST52. If the AT right stock is 0 after the AT right stock is updated by -1, the process proceeds to the non-assist state ST50. That is, when the AT game number counter value is 0 or the falling condition is satisfied, the ending condition for ending the notification of the assist information regarding the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the fall condition is not satisfied (step S452; N), it is determined whether the promotion condition is satisfied (step S455). The establishment of the promotion condition here means establishment of a promotion replay prize. If this promotion condition is not satisfied (step S455; N), the repair AT process is terminated.

  If the promotion condition is satisfied (step S455; Y), the start of the promotion / rush-in AT state is set (step S456), and the in-repair AT process is terminated. Thereby, in the game control apparatus 50, it transfers to RT state 1ST41 from normal state ST40. Moreover, in the production | presentation control apparatus 70, there is no change with the transition assistance state ST54. Thereby, the gaming state from the next game becomes the ART standby state ST33. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

[Processing during transition opportunities]
FIG. 46 shows a process during transition chance in the game progress control process shown in FIG. In this transition chance processing, first, execution of a game effect (freeze effect, rare role expectation effect, continuous notice, etc.) based on the determined effect pattern is started (step S461), and is transmitted when the reel 6 is stopped. It is determined whether a reel stop command has been received (step S462).

  If the reel stop command has not been received (step S462; N), the process proceeds to step S465. When the reel stop command is received (step S462; Y), the reel stop information corresponding to the stopped reel is updated (step S463), and the effect being executed based on the reel stop information (game effect (G effect)). ) Is updated (step S464), and it is determined whether or not a game result command including information on the determination result of winning is received (step S465).

  If no game result command has been received (step S465; N), the process returns to step S462. When the game result command is received (step S465; Y), it is determined whether the fall condition is satisfied (step S466). The establishment of the fall condition here is due to the occurrence of a violation. When a fall replay (special replay 3) prize or SIN prize is established, or when a bell prize that is not established unless it is pushed in a predetermined order ( Push order bell spill).

  When this fall condition is satisfied (step S466; Y), the start of the normal / precursor state is set (step S470), and the process during the transition chance is ended. As a result, the game control device 50 shifts from the RT state 2ST42 to the normal state ST40, and the effect control device 70 shifts from the transition chance effect state ST51 to the non-assist state ST50, and the game state changes from the next game to the normal game state ST10. . The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game.

  If the falling condition is not satisfied (step S466; N), it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S467). The establishment of the transition condition here means establishment of a rush replay prize. It should be noted that, here, the push order effect (predetermined chance effect) is not performed in the game that is internally won for the rush replay prize. If this transition condition is not satisfied (step S467; N), the process during transition chance is terminated. If the transition condition is satisfied (step S467; Y), the number of sets is added and the start of the AT state is set (step S468), the initial value is set in the AT game number counter (step S469), and the transition chance is in progress. The process ends.

  As a result, in the game control device 50, the RT state 2ST42 remains unchanged, but in the effect control device 70, the transition from the transition chance effect state ST51 to the game number fixed assist state ST55a in the specific assist state ST55 is established. Provision of information that assists the player (for example, notification of the pressing order) is started, and the gaming state is changed to the ART state 1ST35a of the ART state 35 from the next game. The effect display is switched to the corresponding effect display based on the betting operation for the next game. That is, the establishment of the rush replay winning here establishes a start condition for starting notification of assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player.

  That is, the effect control device 70 serves as assist information notification means capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Further, the assist information notifying means at least assist information for deriving a start outcome (promotion replay prize) and assist information for avoiding derivation of an end outcome (push order bell spill, SIN prize and fall replay prize). Will be notified.

[Stock acquisition judgment processing]
FIG. 47 shows a stock acquisition determination process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this stock acquisition determination process, it is first determined whether a bonus is in effect (in a special gaming state) (step S481). If the bonus is being acquired (step S481; Y), the bonus stock process (step S490) is performed. To complete the stock acquisition determination process. If it is not during the bonus (step S481; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a penalty state (step S482).

  If it is in the penalty state (step S482; Y), the stock acquisition determination process ends. In the penalty state, the foresign effect and the gasse sign effect are not started. However, if there is AT right stock, the foreword effect may be started. If not in the penalty state (step S482; N), the AT random numbers 1 to 3 are acquired (step S483), and it is determined whether the number of games is added and AT is in progress (step S484). In addition, the number of games on AT is a state in which the game state in the effect control device 70 is the game number variable assist state ST55b and the game state is the ART state 2ST35b.

  If the number of games is not added and the AT is not being executed (step S484; N), a stock lottery process (step S485) is performed in which an AT right acquisition lottery is performed in accordance with the winning prize. Next, a consecutive winning stock process that stocks one AT right when a rare small role is continuously won a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and stocks one AT right every time it wins continuously (step) S486) is performed. Then, if the Bell prize is continuously established for a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times), one AT right is stocked, and one AT right is stocked every time a consecutive winning is made (step S487). I do. In the case where the consecutive winning of the small role combination or the continuous establishment of the Bell prize continues, even if there is an AT right stock, the foreplay effect is not started and the AT right is not digested.

  Next, ceiling stock processing (step S488) for stocking 3 or 5 AT rights based on the execution of 1000 games from the later of the end of the special game state or the end of the specific game state is performed. Thereafter, an extra replay stock process (step S489) for stocking one AT right is performed based on the establishment of the special replay 2 prize (the extra replay prize) according to the gaming state, and the stock acquisition determination process is terminated. In other words, the effect control device 70 stores the execution right (AT right) for causing the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) to notify the assist information based on the predetermined acquisition condition being satisfied. The execution right storage means is possible.

  On the other hand, when the number of games is added and the game is in AT (step S484; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the special zone (step S491). The special zones are a special zone 1ST55b1 and a special zone 2ST55b2 in the game number variable assist state ST55b. If it is this specialized zone (step S491; Y), the stock acquisition determination process ends. If the zone is not a special zone (step S491; N), a special zone transfer lottery process (step S492) is performed in which a lottery for shifting to a special zone is performed in accordance with the winning prize. It is determined whether or not the transition to the zone has been determined (step S493).

  When the transition to the special zone has not been determined (step S493; N), the stock acquisition determination process ends. When the transition to the special zone is determined (step S493; Y), the transition to the corresponding special zone is set (step S494), and it is determined whether the transition is to the special zone 1 or not. (Step S495).

  If it is a transition to the specialized zone 1 (step S495; Y), the number of zone games is determined and set (step S496), and the stock acquisition determination process is terminated. The number of zone games is determined as any of 2 to 25 games using the AT random number 2. If it is not the transition to the specialized zone 1 (step S495; N), the zone continuation rate is determined and set (step S497), and the stock acquisition determination process ends. The zone continuation rate is determined as 50%, 75%, or 90% using the random number 3 for AT.

  FIG. 48 shows a high expectation (probability) of acquiring the AT right in the stock lottery process (step S485) when each rare small role is won, and a special zone transfer lottery when each rare small role is won. The level of expectation (probability) that the transition to the specialized zone is selected in the process (step S492) is shown. The degree of expectation is the lowest for three-player A (weak cherry) and the highest for pure loss. The net loss is a case where no winning combination is won. In the case of this net loss, the acquisition of AT rights or the transition to the specialized zone 2 is confirmed.

[Stock lottery processing]
FIG. 49 shows a stock lottery process in the stock acquisition determination process shown in FIG. In this stock lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery subject combination (rare) is won (step S501). When the lottery target (rare) role is not won (step S501; N), it is determined whether or not a pure loss is won (step S513). When the pure loss is not won (step S513; N), the stock lottery process is terminated. In addition, when a pure loss is won (step S513; Y), the process proceeds to step S510.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination (rare small combination) is won (step S501; Y), the rare combination counter is updated by +1 (step S502), and it is determined whether the rare combination counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 9). (Step S503). When the rare combination counter has not reached the upper limit (step S503; N), the stock determination table corresponding to the lottery probability state is set (step S504), and the combination-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set from the set table. Is set (step S507).

  As shown in FIG. 50, a table corresponding to the AT right lottery probability state is prepared in the stock determination table. If the lottery probability state is a low probability state, the low probability medium stock determination table is set. When this stock determination table is selected, the probability of acquiring an AT right (stock expectation) is 2%. In addition, when the lottery probability state is a high-accuracy state, a high-accuracy medium stock determination table is set.When the lottery probability state is an ultra-high-accuracy state, an ultra-high-probability stock determination table is set. The AT right acquisition lottery is performed with the expected stock expectation.

  If the rare combination counter reaches the upper limit (step S503; Y), the rare combination counter is cleared to 0 (step S505), the ultra-high-probability stock determination table is set (step S506), and set. From the table, a stock judgment table for each role corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S507). When the number of rare small roles won is a predetermined number (for example, 9 times), as a privilege, the AT right acquisition lottery based on the predetermined number of times of winning is an ultra-high accuracy state regardless of the lottery probability state at that time It is done with the probability of.

  Further, the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set corresponding to each stock determination table, and the winning probability of the AT right for each winning combination is determined. In addition, the winning probabilities for each winning combination are determined in the order shown in FIG. In each stock determination table, when the winning probabilities of AT rights in the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are combined, the stock expectation shown in FIG. 50 is obtained.

  After performing the process of setting the role-specific stock determination table corresponding to the winning combination from the set table (step S507), it is determined whether or not to store the AT right based on the AT random number 1 (step S508), and the AT It is determined whether acquisition of the right stock has been determined (step S509). When the AT right stock acquisition is not determined (step S509; N), the stock lottery process is terminated.

  If the AT right stock acquisition is determined (step S509; Y), stock right type determination processing is performed (step S510). There are two types of AT rights: AT rights 1 that is a right to shift to the game number fixed assist state ST55a, that is, the ART state 1ST35a, and AT rights 2 that are rights to transition to the game number variable assist state ST55b, that is, the ART state 2ST35b. The right to be used is determined based on the random number 2 for AT. Note that AT right 1 is selected with a higher probability.

  Then, a stock number determination process (step S511) for determining the number of AT rights to be stocked (for example, 1 to 5) based on the winning combination and the AT random number 3 is performed, and the AT right stock information is updated based on the determination result. (Step S512), the stock lottery process is terminated.

[Stock processing during bonus]
FIG. 51 shows stock processing during bonus in the stock acquisition determination processing shown in FIG. In this bonus stock process, first, a branch process in the game mode (step S521) is performed, and after performing the corresponding process, the bonus stock process is terminated.

  If the game mode is PB (corresponding to the PB state), PB stock processing is performed (step S522). If the game mode is BB1 (corresponding to the BB1 state), BB1 stock processing is performed (step S523). If the game mode is BB2 (corresponding to the BB2 state), BB2 stock processing is performed (step S524). If the game mode is RB (corresponding to the RB state), RB stock processing is performed (step S525).

[Stock processing in BB1]
FIG. 52 shows the stock process during BB1 in the stock process during bonus shown in FIG. In the stock process during BB1, first, it is determined whether or not a slug entry replay winning is established (step S531), and if not established (step S531; N), the process proceeds to step S533. Further, when the Naname rush replay winning is established (step S531; Y), the number of sets added to the AT right (AT right 1) stock number is updated by +1 (step S532).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the middle stage replay winning has been established (step S533), and if not (step S533; N), the process proceeds to step S535. If the middle stage replay winning is established (step S533; Y), the number of games is added and the AT number (AT right 2) stock number is updated by +1 (step S534).

  Then, it is determined whether or not an end command transmitted when the operation intervening freeze is received (step S535). If no end command is received (step S535; N), the BB1 stock processing is ended. If an end command has been received (step S535; Y), the number of continued command receptions + 1 is added to the number of games added to the AT right (AT right 2) stock number (step S536), and BB1. End stock processing.

[Specialized zone transfer lottery processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special zone transfer lottery process in the stock acquisition determination process shown in FIG. In this special zone transfer lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a lottery subject combination (rare) is won (step S541). If the winning combination (rare) is not won (step S541; N), it is determined whether or not a pure loss is won (step S549). And when it is not winning a pure loss (step S549; N), a special zone transfer lottery process is complete | finished. Further, when a win is won (step S549; Y), the transition information to the special zone 2 is set (step S550), and the special zone transition lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination (rare) is won (step S541; Y), a role-specific zone transition determination table corresponding to the winning combination is set (step S542). As shown in FIG. 54, in the role-specific zone transition determination table, the transition expectation (probability) to the specialized zone 2 when each winning combination is won is determined. In the case of winning, the table for three-piece combination A is selected, and the transition to the specialized zone 1 or 2 is selected with a probability of 0.005%.

  After setting the role-specific zone shift determination table corresponding to the winning role (step S542), it is determined whether or not to shift to the special zone based on the AT random number 1 (step S543), and the shift to the special zone is performed. It is determined whether it has been determined (step S544). And when transfer to a special zone is not determined (step S544; N), a special zone transfer lottery process is complete | finished.

  Further, when the shift to the special zone is determined (step S544; Y), the special zone is determined based on the AT random number 2 (step S545). It is determined whether or not migration has been determined (step S546). The transition to the special zone 1 is selected with a high probability (for example, 99% for the special zone 1 and 1% for the special zone 2).

  When the transition to the special zone 1 is determined (step S546; Y), the transition information to the special zone 1 is set (step S547), and the special zone transition lottery process is terminated. If the transition to the specialized zone 1 is not determined (step S546; N), that is, if the transition to the specialized zone 2 is determined, the transition information to the specialized zone 2 is set (step S548), the special zone shift lottery process is terminated.

[Stock lottery mode transition process]
FIG. 55 shows a stock lottery mode transition process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this stock lottery mode transition process, first, it is determined whether or not the super high probability mode (super high probability state) is set (step S561). When it is not the super high probability mode (super high probability state) (step S561; N), a lottery mode promotion determination process (step S562) is performed to determine whether there is a promotion (step S563).

  In the lottery mode promotion determination process (step S562), a lottery for promotion is performed based on the current lottery mode and the type of winning combination. The probability of winning the promotion varies depending on the type of the rare small role selected, and FIG. 56 shows the order of the mode promotion expectation, which is the probability of promotion when each rare small role is won. This mode promotion expectation is the lowest in the single-player combination A (chance eye A) and the highest in the three-player combination A (weak cherry). This order is different from the order of AT right stock expectation and specialized zone transition expectation shown in FIG. 48. In FIG. 48, many of the rare small actors whose expectation ranks were low are expected rank in FIG. Is to be higher.

  If there is no promotion (step S5563; N), the process proceeds to step S567. If there is a promotion (step S563; Y), it is determined whether the promotion is to the ultra high probability mode (step S564). When the lottery mode before promotion is the low probability mode (low probability state), it is possible to shift to the high probability mode (high probability state) or the ultra high probability mode. In addition, when the lottery mode before promotion is the high probability mode, only the transition to the ultra-high probability mode is possible.

  If it is not promoted to the ultra-high probability mode (step S564; N), the high probability mode is set (step S565), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. In the case of promotion to the super high probability mode (step S564; Y), the super high probability mode is set (step S566), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is in the super high probability mode (step S561; Y), lottery mode demotion determination processing (step S567) is performed to determine whether there is demotion (step S568). In the lottery mode demotion determination process (step S567), demotion is determined based on staying a predetermined number of games in the current lottery mode. Alternatively, a lottery for demotion is performed based on staying a predetermined number of games in the current lottery mode, and a demotion is determined based on the result of the lottery.

  When the lottery mode is not demoted (step S568; N), the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. Further, when there is a demotion (step S568; Y), it is determined whether the demotion is to the low probability mode (the low probability state) (step S569). If it is demoted to the low probability mode (step S569; Y), the low probability mode is set (step S570), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated. If not demoted to the low probability mode (step S569; N), the high probability mode is set (step S571), and the stock lottery mode transition process is terminated.

[Continuous notice setting process]
FIG. 57 shows a continuous notice setting process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In this continuous notice setting process, first, it is determined whether a bonus is in effect (in a special gaming state) (step S581). If a bonus is being given (step S581; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If the bonus is not in effect (step S581; N), it is determined whether or not a bonus prize (special prize) has been established in the current game (step S582).

  If a bonus winning is established in this game (step S582; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If no bonus winning is achieved in the current game (step S582; N), it is determined whether a bonus winning is won in the current game (step S583). When the bonus winning is not won in the current game (step S583; N), it is determined whether the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed (step S584).

  When the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed (step S584; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. In addition, when the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is not being executed (step S584; N), it is determined whether or not the rare combination (rare small combination) is won (step S585). If the rare combination is not won (step S585; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If a rare combination is won (step S585; Y), a process for determining whether to continuously lose notice is performed (step S586), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the consecutive lose notice is determined (step S587).

  In the losing continuous notice execution determination process, the execution of the losing continuous notice is determined with a probability corresponding to the gaming state and the type of the rare role winning. Rare small roles may be won in duplicate with special prizes, so if you do not win in duplicate with special prizes, you will be able to run a continuous notice of loss, raising the expectation for winning special prizes, The fun of gaming can be improved. It should be noted that depending on the gaming state, it may not be determined to execute the continuous losing notice. In addition, even if the special winning flag is carried over, it is determined not to execute the continuous losing notice. When it is determined to execute the continuous losing notice (step S587; Y), the continuation notice pattern for losing is determined from the losing continuous notice table (step S588), the continuous continuation notice is set (step S589), and the continuous notice setting is performed. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if a bonus win is won in this game (step S583; Y), it is determined whether there is a setting for continuous notice of loss (step S590). When there is a continuous continuous notice setting (step S590; Y), a process of replacing the continuous continuous notice setting with the continuous notice setting is performed (step S591), and the continuous notice setting process ends. In the process of replacing the continuous continuous notice setting with the continuous continuous notice setting (step S591), the number of continuous notice games and the execution pattern, which are the number of games for which the continuous notice is executed, are as follows. Without changing, the result notification effect performed at the end of the continuous notice is changed from the loss result effect to the hit result effect.

  If there is no lost continuous notice setting (step S590; N), the winning continuous notice pattern is determined from the winning continuous notice table (step S592), the winning continuous notice is set (step S593), and the continuous notice setting process is performed. Exit. That is, based on the fact that the production control device 70 has won a special role or an overlapping target role (rare small role) that may be won in duplicate with the special role in the internal lottery, it continues across a plurality of games. A continuous notice execution means capable of giving a notice is provided.

  In addition, only when a rare small role that may be elected in duplicate with a special prize is won (only if the special prize has not been won), the consecutive loss notice can be executed. Even if the player is not elected, the losing continuous notice may be executed. In addition, the continuous notice of losing is not executed when the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is being executed, but the continuous notice is executed if there is no problem with the sign effect (especially the continuous effect during the sign effect). You may do it.

  On the other hand, if the execution of the continuous loss notice has not been determined (step S587; N), it is determined whether the ART state is in effect (step S594). If it is not in the ART state (step S594; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. In the case of the ART state (step S594; Y), it is determined whether the winning or losing continuous notice is in progress (step S595).

  If the winning or losing continuous notice is in progress (step S595; Y), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not during the winning or losing continuous notice (step S595; N), it is determined whether or not the AT right is acquired in the current game (step S596). When the AT right is acquired in the current game (step S596; Y), the winning continuous effect B or C in which the winning result effect is finally performed is set (step S597), and the continuous notice setting process is ended. The continuous effect will be described later (see FIG. 60).

  If the AT right cannot be acquired in this game (step S596; N), a process for determining whether to continuously perform the lost effect is performed (step S598), and it is determined whether or not the execution of the lost consecutive effect is determined (step S599). If the execution of the continuous loss production is not determined (step S599; N), the continuous notice setting process is terminated. If it is decided to execute the continuous loss production (step S599; Y), the continuous continuous production B or C in which the final loss result production is performed is set (step S600), and the continuous notice setting process is terminated. To do. That is, the effect control device 70 may change from a game that may have stored an execution right (AT right) for notifying assist information related to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, or a subsequent game to a plurality of games. A continuous production execution means capable of executing a continuous production (continuous production: equivalent to the second continuous production) is provided.

  The winning continuous effect is a confirmed effect that can recognize that the AT right has been acquired. Therefore, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect (a winning continuous effect) in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or a subsequent game. Here, the continuous effect (second continuous effect) is not executed except during the ART state, but this final effect (winning continuous effect) may be performed. By doing in this way, for example, a game is played with the expectation that a definite effect (a winning continuous effect) will be executed even in a specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of assist information has ended. Can do.

  It should be noted that the execution of the present sign effect or the gusset sign effect (step S584; Y) may include the execution of a winning or losing continuous effect in the ART state. Further, when there is a continuous losing notice setting (step S590; Y), it may include a case where there is a continuous losing effect setting in the ART state. In this case, the losing continuous effect is notified of the winning of the special prize. Replace with production. Moreover, even if it is in the case of winning or winning continuous notice, it is possible to execute a continuous effect. In particular, when the losing continuous notice is being made, it is possible that the continuous effect can be executed.

  FIG. 58A shows a win continuous notice pattern which is an execution pattern of hit continuous notice, and FIG. 58B shows a lose continuous notice pattern which is an execution pattern of lose continuous notice. The continuous notice is composed of a sign production performed in the first few games and a continuous production performed in the second half games. The indication effect is an effect of changing the sound (stop sound or the like), the light emission mode (backlight 111, the frame light emitting device 7 or the like), the display mode of the image display device 3 or the like step by step every time the game is repeated.

  The continuous effect is an effect of a continuous story over a plurality of games, and a loss result effect or a hit result effect is performed as a result notification effect that is finally performed. In addition, there are three types of continuous production, A, B, and C, with different production contents (story etc.). System A is a special effect for the special prize, and is an effect performed only by the image display device 3. The B system is a common effect for the special winning and the AT state occurrence, and is an effect using the image display device 3 and the movable effect device 8. The C system is a special effect for the occurrence of the AT state, and is an effect performed only by the image display device 3. In addition, you may make it comprise by a continuous effect, without performing a sign effect.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the hit continuous notice pattern, the number of continuous notice games, which is the number of games for which continuous notice is executed, is 4 to 7 games, and the systems A and B are included as the series of continuous effects included respectively. There are a total of 8 patterns with 2 types of systems. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the lost continuous notice pattern includes 4 to 6 consecutive notice games, which are the number of games for which the continuous notice is executed, and the A system as a series of continuous effects included therein. There are a total of six types of patterns including two types of B and B.

  The execution patterns of 4 to 6 games with consecutive notice games are common and common to loses, and the result is not known until the final result notification effect. However, an effect suggesting the result may be performed during the continuous notice. In addition, the execution pattern of 7 consecutive notice games can be selected only when it is a win, and it can be recognized that the success pattern is a win when the continuous notice exceeds 6 games.

[AT precursor setting processing]
FIG. 59 shows AT precursor setting processing in the effect control processing shown in FIG. In this AT precursor process, it is first determined whether a bonus winning / carrying-over is in progress, that is, whether a special winning is won in the current game or a special winning flag is being carried over (step S601). If the bonus is being won / carrying over (step S601; Y), the AT precursor setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the bonus is not won or carried over (step S601; N), it is determined whether there is an AT right stock (step S602), and if there is an AT right stock (step S602; Y), the normal / precursor It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S603). Note that the normal / predictive state is the non-assist state ST50 or the predecessor game state ST52 in the effect control device 70. If the normal / precursor is not in progress (step S603; N), the AT precursor setting process is terminated. Thereby, at least in the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of the assist information is ended, the precursor effect (predetermined continuous effect) is not performed, and the game proceeds smoothly.

  Further, if it is normal / precursor (step S603; Y), it is determined whether the present precursor effect is being performed (step S604), and if it is the present precursor effect (step S604; Y), the AT precursor is set. The process ends. Further, when it is not under the present sign effect (step S604; N), it is determined whether the sign indication effect is being performed (step S605).

  If it is not during the harsh sign effect (step S605; N), the process proceeds to step S607. Further, when the gasse sign effect is being performed (step S605; Y), the setting related to the gasse sign is cleared (step S606). Thereby, it will be changed from the Gase sign production to the present sign production. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the present sign setting condition is satisfied (step S607). The sign setting condition is that the consecutive winning of the rare small role or the continuous establishment of the bell winning is not continued and the continuous notice is not executed. The condition that the continuous notice is not executed here is to prevent the expectation for the winning of the special prize from being attenuated by performing the precursor effect during the execution of the continuous notice. .

  If the present sign setting condition is not satisfied (step S607; N), the AT sign setting process ends. When the precursor setting conditions are satisfied (step S607; Y), the number of precursor games, which is the number of games that execute the precursor effect, is determined (step S608), and until the precursor game is digested. The precursor effect pattern is determined (step S609). Thereafter, the execution of the present sign effect is set (step S610), and the AT sign setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is no AT right stock (step S602; N), it is determined whether normal / precursor is in progress (step S611). If the normal / precursor is not in progress (step S611; N), the AT precursor setting process is terminated. As a result, at least in the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after the notification of the assist information is finished, the gasse sign effect is not executed, and the disappointment and loss of the player when falling to the normal gaming state ST10 is reduced. It becomes possible to do. There is also an advantage that the game proceeds smoothly. Further, in the normal gaming state ST10 (non-assist state ST50), even if the AT right cannot be obtained, the feeling of disappointment or loss is not so great, and the player's expectation is felt by executing the continuation effect (prediction effect). It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by effectively playing.

  Further, when it is normal / precursor (step S611; Y), it is determined whether or not the present precursor effect is being performed (step S612), and when the present precursor effect is being performed (step S612; Y), the AT precursor is set. The process ends. Further, when it is not under the present sign effect (step S612; N), it is determined whether the sign indication effect is being performed (step S613).

  If it is during the harsh sign effect (step S613; Y), the AT sign setting process ends. Further, when it is not during the gasse warning effect (step S613; N), a gasse warning execution determination process is performed (step S614), and it is determined whether execution of the gasse warning effect is determined (step S615).

  In the Gase precursor execution determination process (step S614), execution of the Gase precursor effect is determined based on the AT lottery mode, the winning combination, etc. For example, in the low probability that the possibility of acquiring the AT right is low In addition, the execution of the gasse precursor effect is determined with a higher probability than in the high accuracy or ultra high accuracy, the expectation for acquiring the AT right is increased, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the execution of the gasse sign production is determined with a higher probability after the winning of a rare role with a high possibility of acquiring AT rights (AT stock expectation), and the interest of the game is further improved. In addition, if the advance notice is being executed, the execution of the advance notice will not be decided when the advance notice is being executed, and the expectation for the winning of the special prize will be reduced. Is preventing.

  Then, if execution of the gasse sign effect is not determined (step S615; N), the AT sign setting process ends. In addition, when execution of the gasse sign effect is decided (step S615; Y), the number of gaze sign games, which is the number of games for which the gasse sign effect is executed, is decided (step S616), and the gaze sign game is consumed. A gasse sign effect pattern is determined (step S617). Thereafter, the execution of the gaze precursor effect is set (step S618), and the AT precursor setting process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 70 may change from a game that may have stored an execution right (AT right) for notifying assist information related to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, or a subsequent game to a plurality of games. A continuous production execution means capable of executing a predetermined continuous production (prediction production: equivalent to the first continuous production) is provided.

  FIG. 60A shows a real sign effect pattern that is an execution pattern of the real sign effect, and FIG. 60B shows a gase sign effect pattern that is an execution pattern of the gaze sign effect. The precursor effect is composed of a predictor effect, a special effect, and a continuous effect. In addition, there is a case where only the predictive effect is produced in the Gase sign effect. The sign effect is a lively effect, and the sound (stop sound, etc.), the light emission mode (backlight 111, the frame light emission device 7, etc.), and the display mode (character appearance, etc.) of the image display device 3 are different from usual. It is an effect as an aspect.

  In addition, the special performance is performed by moving to a special stage (for example, the background is different) different from the normal performance. The continuous effect is an effect of a continuous story over a plurality of games, and an effect of notifying the presence or absence of transition to the AT (ART) state is performed as a result notification effect that is finally performed. In the sign effect, it is possible to execute a continuous effect of the B system that is a common effect for the special prize and the occurrence of the AT state and the C system that is a dedicated effect for the occurrence of the AT state. In addition, in the game displayed as “none”, no effect related to the sign effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the foreplay effect pattern includes 11, 13, 15, 17 or 19 games that are the number of games for which the foreplay effect is executed. There are 11 different patterns. Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the gasse sign effect pattern, the number of gasse sign games, which is the number of games for which the gasse sign effect is executed, is 13, 15 or 17, and the execution mode of the effects is different. There are different types of patterns.

  There are patterns in which the number of precursor games is 13, 15, and 17 games, which are the same execution modes for both the foreplay effect and the gasse sign effect, and in these patterns, the result until the result notification effect that is finally performed is obtained. I don't know. However, an effect suggesting the result may be performed in the middle of the sign effect.

  In addition, the patterns of 11 and 19 game signs can be selected only in the case of the prelude effect, and in this case, it is possible to recognize that it is the predecessor effect from the timing of shifting to the continuous effect. That is, this sign effect is a confirmed effect capable of recognizing that the AT right has been acquired. Therefore, the effect control device 70 serves as a confirmed effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which it is determined that the AT right is stored or a game thereafter.

  As described with reference to FIG. 57, in the ART state, the winning continuous effect B or C (step S597) or the lost continuous effect B or C (step S600) is set depending on whether or not the AT right is acquired. These continuous effects are the same effects as the continuous effects in FIG. In this case, the sign effect and the special effect are not performed, but the sign effect and the special effect may be performed similarly to the sign effect pattern.

  Here, during the transition chance (transition chance state ST31), the precursor effect is not performed, but this final effect may be performed. Further, not only the final effect but also the sign effect may be performed. In other words, it may be determined not to determine whether or not there is a transition chance (step S603). By doing in this way, even if it is the specific state (transition chance state ST31) after notification of assist information is complete | finished, a game can be played in anticipation that a fixed effect will be performed.

  Basically, the sign effect can be executed in the normal / pre-sign (non-assist state ST50), but the game state in which the sign effect can be executed may be set in more detail. For example, in the normal state that is neither the AT state, the RT state, nor the ART state, execution of the warning effect may be prohibited during the execution of the continuous notice, or the continuous notice is being executed in the normal state. It may be possible to perform a prelude production.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display, When a game corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery is derived as a result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation, the slot machine where the winning of the winning combination is established has a predetermined start Specific state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a specific state in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the normal state until a predetermined end result is derived from Assist information notifying means (production control device 70) capable of notifying assist information regarding a stop operation that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined acquisition condition The execution right storage means (production control device 70) capable of storing the execution right for causing the assist information notification means to notify the assist information based on the fact that the execution right is established, and the execution right are stored. Continuation effect execution means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) over a plurality of games from a possible game or a subsequent game, and assist The information notifying means notifies at least the assist information for deriving the start outcome and the assist information for avoiding the derivation of the end outcome, and the continuous effect executing means notifies the assist information when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. In the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the means is completed, the predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) is not executed.

  Here, the game with the possibility of memorizing the execution right is, for example, when the specific right is internally won for the specific combination when the execution right can be acquired with a predetermined probability. It is a game. “Execution rights can be acquired with a predetermined probability” includes a case where acquisition is determined based on a lottery result or a case where the execution right can be acquired by applying a pushing order. The predetermined continuation effect is an effect that is executed over a plurality of games to notify that there is a possibility that the execution right for notifying the assist information is stored. What is called and what is called continuous production. This precursor effect includes a present precursor effect that is executed when the execution right is stored and a gasse precursor effect that is executed when the execution right is not stored. In addition, the continuous effects include a hit continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is stored and a lost continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is not stored.

  Further, the predetermined continuation effect includes a second continuation effect (continuous effect) in which the first continuation effect (prediction effect) and the first continuation effect are different from each other. In the normal state, the first continuation effect (prediction effect) is executed, while in the specific state in which the assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is executing the second continuation effect (continuous effect). Will be executed.

  Also, a special state generating means (game control) capable of generating a special state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special role is won in the internal lottery and the outcome corresponding to the special role is derived. Device 50), and a continuous advance notice that can be performed across multiple games based on winning a special role or an overlapping target role that may be won in duplicate in the internal lottery. A notice execution means (effect control device 70), and the continuation effect execution means is a specific state in which notification of assist information by the normal state and / or assist information notification means (effect control device 70) is being executed. However, when the continuous notice is being executed, the predetermined continuation effect (prediction effect, continuous effect) is not executed.

  In addition, the game includes a confirmed effect executing means (effect control device 70) capable of executing a predetermined confirmed effect in a game in which execution rights are determined to be stored or a game thereafter, and the confirmed effect executing means includes assist information. Even in the specific state after the notification of the assist information by the notification means (the effect control device 70) ends, the predetermined confirmed effect is executed.

  Here, the predetermined confirmed effect is an effect for notifying that the memory of the execution right has been confirmed, and is, for example, a sign effect or a hit continuous effect that is executed when the execution right is stored.

[Security monitoring processing]
FIG. 61 shows the security monitoring process in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this security monitoring process, first, a medal insertion fraud handling process (step S621) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of a medal insertion error command is performed. Next, a radio wave fraud countermeasure process (step S622) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of the radio wave fraud command is performed.

  Then, based on reception of a door opening or closing command transmitted with opening / closing of the front frame 2, a corresponding error notification and door opening handling processing for performing manual symbol alignment assistance (step S623) is performed, and a medal full error command is received. The medal full error handling process (step S624) for performing the corresponding error notification based on the above is performed. Thereafter, a medal payout error handling process (step S625) for performing a corresponding error notification based on reception of the payout switch error command is performed, and the security monitoring process is terminated.

(Door opening handling process)
FIG. 62 shows door opening handling processing in the security monitoring processing shown in FIG. In this door opening handling process, it is first determined whether or not a door opening command has been received (step S631). If not received (step S631; N), the process proceeds to step S638. When the door opening command is received (step S631; Y), the start of door opening notification is set (step S632). The door opening notification notifies that the front frame 2 is open, and is performed by voice, display, light emission, or the like.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the door is first opened since the power is turned on (step S633). If it is not the first door opened (step S634; N), the door opening handling process is terminated. Thereby, unnecessary light emission such that the winning line light emitting unit 112 emits light each time the front frame 2 is opened during business can be prevented.

  If the door is first opened after the power is turned on (step S634; Y), the value of the light emission line setting switch is acquired (step S635), and lighting of the winning line light emission unit corresponding to the set value is set (step S635). S636). Thereafter, the backlight of the portion not corresponding to the lit winning line light emitting unit is turned off (step S637), and it is determined whether a door closing command is received (step S638). It should be noted that the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the lit winning line light emitting unit 112 may be dimmed rather than extinguished.

  If the door closing command has not been received (step S638; N), the door opening handling process ends. When the door closing command is received (step S638; Y), the end of door opening notification is set (step S639), and the winning line light emitting unit is turned off (step S640). And the all lighting command of all the backlights is transmitted (step S641), and the door opening corresponding | compatible process is complete | finished. Thus, by returning to the lighting state before opening based on closing of the front frame 2, the winning line light emitting unit 112 emits necessary light only when the symbols are aligned with the symbol stop line, and unnecessary paying line light emitting unit 112 is unnecessary. Can be prevented.

  That is, the production control device 70 causes the line light emitting unit (winning line light emitting unit 112) to emit light based on the detection of the opening of the front door (front frame 2) by the opening detection means (game control device 50). It makes possible light emission control means. Further, the light emission line setting switch 112a serves as a light emission setting unit for setting a line light emitting unit to emit light by the light emission control unit.

  FIG. 63 shows how the manual symbol alignment assist is performed when the front frame 2 is first opened after the slot machine 1 is powered on. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the front frame 2 is closed, a predetermined number (for example, three) of symbols on the reel 6 via the symbol display window 5, that is, a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols. The design is visible. Here, for convenience, only “7” forming a specific symbol and the joint serving as the reference portion 6e are displayed. Further, in the region that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 5, the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 is visible in the region other than the portion where each reel 6 is located.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a winning line light emitting unit 112 indicating an effective line corresponding to the established winning is provided in a portion visible through the symbol display window 5 on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110. Yes. In addition, a backlight 111 that can illuminate each symbol located on the effective line of the reel 6 is provided on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and at a position behind the reel 6.

  In a state where the slot machine 1 is turned on and no game is played, the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned off and all the backlights 111 are turned on as shown in FIG. When the front frame 2 is opened, the winning line light emission unit 112 corresponding to the setting of the light emission line setting switch 112a is turned on as manual symbol alignment assistance as shown in FIG. Further, the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned off. Here, the setting of the light emission line setting switch 112a is set to “middle stage”, and the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the middle line are turned on. As the front frame 2 is opened, a sound “door is open!” Is output as a door opening notification.

  By performing such manual symbol alignment assist, when the reels 6 are manually rotated to align a desired symbol on the symbol stop line, the position of the symbol stop line becomes easy to understand. It becomes easy to arrange a predetermined pattern in a line. In addition, by turning on only the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111 for aligning symbols, it becomes obvious at a glance which symbol stop line should have a predetermined symbol. Further, by dimming or extinguishing the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the symbol stop line in which symbols are arranged, it is possible to make the light emission of the winning line light emitting unit 112 conspicuous, and the position of the symbol stop line becomes easy to understand. In addition, you may make it light-emit only any one of the winning line light emission part 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the symbol stop line which aligns a symbol.

  Further, by switching the light emission line setting switch 112a, it is possible to turn on the winning line light emission unit 112 and the backlight 111 corresponding to the right lowering line or the left lowering line. In this way, since it is possible to set which winning line light emitting unit 112 emits light, it is possible to easily change the symbol stop line in which predetermined symbols are aligned. Accordingly, it is possible to assist the operation of aligning a desired symbol with the right-down line or the left-down line in addition to the middle line. In other words, the effect control device 70 serves as a manual operation assisting unit that assists a manual operation for rotating a plurality of reels 6 so that a desired symbol is arranged on the symbol stop line.

  The variable display device 100 includes a positioning unit including a positioning line 113a displayed on the front surface of the light emitting base member 110 and a positioning display unit 113b displayed on the reel base member 101 as a guide for aligning specific symbols. 113 is provided. Then, by manually rotating each reel 6 so that the reference portion 6e of the reel 6 is aligned with the positioning line 113a and the positioning display portion 113b, a specific symbol “7” can be easily aligned with the middle stage line. It can be done.

  Even when a specific symbol is aligned with the middle line using the positioning unit 113, the efficiency of work can be improved by performing manual symbol alignment assist for lighting the winning line light emitting unit 112 and the backlight 111. it can. As described above, the positioning unit 113 may be provided at a position corresponding to the lower right line and the lower left line in addition to the position corresponding to the middle line. Further, a moving mechanism that enables the positioning unit 113 to operate along the circumferential direction of the reel 6 may be provided, and the positioning unit 113 may automatically move in accordance with the switching of the light emission line setting switch 112a. .

  Alternatively, the predetermined pay line light emission unit 112 (for example, the middle line) may be turned on without providing the light emission line setting switch 112a. Further, both the manual operation assisting means constituted by the positioning part 113 and the reference part 6e and the manual operation assisting means constituted by the winning line light emitting part 112 and the backlight 111 are provided. You may make it provide only. Also, the operation of aligning the reels 6 by manual operation is assisted, but for example, when the store clerk operates a button, the reels 6 are operated so that the symbols set on the preset symbol stop line are automatically aligned. You may make it provide the mechanism to do.

  From the above, the variable display device 100 having a plurality of reels 6 capable of variable display of a plurality of symbols, the front open concave housing 1a that houses the variable display device 100, and the front surface of the housing 1a In the slot machine 1 provided with a front door (front frame 2) provided with a window portion (symbol display window 5) that is supported so as to be openable and closable so that the front portions of the plurality of reels 6 can be visually recognized. A line light emitting part (winning line light emitting part 112) provided along the symbol stop line located so as to cross the front part of the player, and an opening detection means (game control device 50) capable of detecting the opening of the front door And a light emission control means (effect control device 70) capable of causing the line light emitting portion to emit light based on the detection of the opening of the front door by the opening detection means.

  Here, the symbol stop line (symbol alignment line) is a virtual line that connects symbols that can be visually recognized from the window among the symbols of the reels 6 for which the variable display is stopped. It may be the same as the effective line for determining the formation of the winning combination, or may not match.

  Further, a plurality of line light emitting units (winning line light emitting unit 112) are provided along each of the plurality of symbol stop lines, and the light emission control means (production control device 70) is a specific symbol among the plurality of symbol stop lines. The line light emitting unit corresponding to the stop line is caused to emit light.

  Moreover, the light emission setting means (light emission line setting switch 112a) for setting the line light emission part (winning line light emission part 112) to light-emit by the light emission control means (effect control apparatus 70) will be provided.

  Further, the reel 6 can transmit light, and the backlight 111 that can irradiate the front part facing the window of the reel 6 from the inside of the reel 6 and the control of the backlight 111 can be performed. Backlight control means (effect control device 70), and the backlight control means is at least a backlight when the light emission control means (effect control device 70) causes the line light emitting unit (winning line light emitting unit 112) to emit light. A part of the light 111 is dimmed or turned off.

  The backlight control means (effect control device 70) is a portion of the backlight 111 corresponding to the symbol stop line corresponding to the line light emission portion (winning line light emission portion 112) that the light emission control means (effect control device 70) emits light. In other words, the portion of the backlight 111 that does not correspond to the symbol stop line is dimmed or extinguished.

  Further, the light emission control means (the effect control device 70) is configured so that the line light emission unit (winning line light emission unit 112) is detected when the front door (front frame 2) is first opened after the slot machine 1 is turned on. ) Is emitted.

  In addition, the light emission control means (production control device 70) is configured to detect the line light emission unit (winning line light emission unit 112) based on the fact that the opening detection means (game control device 50) does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame 2). ) Is terminated.

(Door opening handling process)
FIG. 64 shows a modification of the door opening handling process shown in FIG. In the following description, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly changed portions will be described. In this door opening handling process, the processes of steps S651 and S652 are performed instead of the processes of steps S633 to S636. In addition, the process of step S653 is performed instead of the process of step S640.

  That is, the manual symbol alignment assist is performed even if the door is not opened for the first time after the power is turned on. Further, the light emission line setting switch 112a is not provided, and lighting of the winning line light emission unit 112 at a preset position (middle stage) is set (step S652). Further, when the front frame 2 is opened, the current emission state of the pay line light emitting unit 112 is stored (step S651), and when the front frame 2 is closed, the light emission state of the pay line light emitting unit 112 is determined based on the stored information. It is made to return (step S653). As a result, the manual symbol alignment assist can be performed without any problems even after the game is played after the power is turned on (for example, during business).

  When a game is won and a winning is achieved, the winning line light emitting unit 112 along the effective line in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning are arranged is turned on to notify the winning. When the front frame 2 is opened in this state, the light emission state of the winning line light emitting unit 112 along the effective line in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the winnings are aligned is stored to finish the light emission, and the winning line light emission corresponding to the middle line is performed. The part 112 lights up. When the front frame 2 is closed, the winning line light emitting unit 112 corresponding to the middle line is turned off, and the winning line light emitting unit 112 is turned on in the stored light emitting state. The positioning unit 113 may be provided only at a position corresponding to the symbol stop line corresponding to the winning line light emitting unit 112 that emits light when the front frame 2 is opened.

  That is, the light emission control means (effect control device 70) stores the light emission state of the line light emission portion (winning line light emission portion 112) before the front door (front frame 2) is opened (effect control device 70). When the front door is opened, only the line light emitting portion corresponding to the specific symbol stop line among the plurality of symbol stop lines is caused to emit light, and the light emission state stored in the light emission state storage means when the front door is closed. It is supposed to be restored.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification is configured so that freeze effects can be distributed and executed in the game.

[Reel rotation start processing]
In the slot machine of this modification, the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 65 is performed instead of the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation start process, the process from step S661 to S663 is performed instead of the normal freeze process (step S65).

  If it is not an operation-interposed freeze (step S64; N), it is determined whether a short freeze is present (step S661). Here, the short freeze is a freeze effect with a freeze time of less than 60 seconds. If it is this short freeze (step S661; Y), short freeze processing is performed (step S662), and when the short freeze ends, the number of reel rotation steps is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). The short freeze process (step S662) is the same process as the normal freeze process (step S65).

  On the other hand, if it is not a short freeze (step S661; N), a long freeze process is performed (step S663), and when the long freeze ends, the reel rotation step number is set to infinity (reel rotation start is set) (step S67). ). In the long freeze process (step S663), a process related to the dispersion of freeze effects is performed. In this way, it is possible to distribute the freeze effect only in the case of the long freeze, so the annoyance can be reduced for the freeze effect that is executed over a period longer than the length that the player feels annoyed. A short freeze production will allow the player to have a solid experience.

  FIG. 66 shows a break in the freeze time for the long freeze effect. The period from the start of the freeze time to a predetermined time (t1 to t4) is a dispersible period (first half freeze period). This period is a period during which the player can make a selection to distribute the freeze effect in the game by performing a predetermined selection operation. In this dispersible period, three periods of a first period (t1 to t2), a second period (t2 to t3), and a third period (t3 to t4) are determined, and the player can perform a predetermined selection operation. The dispersion mode (dispersion freeze setting) of the freeze effect is made different depending on the period of time.

  The predetermined selection operation may be, for example, an operation of an operation unit input to the game control device 50 such as the start lever 21, the max bet button 17, the reel stop button 24, etc. It is preferable that That is, since the start lever 21 and the reel stop button 24 may be continuously operated for the progress of the game, the freeze effect is dispersed even when the player does not intend to use these inputs as predetermined selection operations. There is a possibility that. However, if the operation input of the Max Bet button 17 where the game does not proceed even if operated during the game is a predetermined selection operation, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the freeze effect is unintentionally dispersed. .

  Further, the period from the end of the dispersible period to the end of the freeze time (t4 to t5) is a non-dispersible period (second half freeze period), and the dispersion of the freeze effect cannot be selected during this period. In this modified example, it is possible to select the distribution of the freeze effect in the immediate freeze in which the freeze effect is performed in the game in which the freeze effect is determined, and the game after several games from the game in which the freeze effect is determined to be executed. In the case of a freeze effect in the case of a stand-by freeze that performs a freeze effect (excluding the operation-mediated freeze effect here), the selection of dispersion cannot be made (all periods cannot be dispersed). Of course, in the case of standby freeze, it is also possible to select a dispersion of freeze effects.

[Long freeze treatment]
FIG. 67 shows a long freeze process in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this long freeze process, first, a reel effect operation process (step S671) for effecting the reel 6 in a predetermined rotation mode (low speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) in the selected freeze effect is performed. That is, the game control device 50 serves as an effect variation display means capable of causing the variation display unit (reel 6) to perform a predetermined effect variation display while the freeze state is occurring. And it is determined whether it is during the dispersible period which can accept predetermined | prescribed selection operation of the player for distributing a freezing effect (step S672).

  If it is not during this dispersible period (step S672; N), it is determined whether the value of the freeze timer for managing the freeze time is 0, that is, whether the freeze time has expired (step S689). If the value of the freeze timer is not 0 (step S689; N), the process returns to step S671. If the value of the freeze timer is 0 (step S689; Y), a freeze end command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S690), and the process proceeds to step S684.

  On the other hand, if it is during the dispersible period (step S672; Y), an operation instruction command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S673). In the effect control device 70, based on the reception of the operation instruction command, the image display device 3 performs an effect such as a display for prompting a predetermined selection operation. Thereafter, it is determined whether the dispersible period has ended (step S674). If the dispersible period has ended (step S674; Y), the process proceeds to step S689. If the distributable period has not ended (step S674; N), it is determined whether there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation (step S675).

  If there is no operation input based on the predetermined selection operation (step S675; N), the process returns to step S671. Further, when there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation (step S675; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in the first period (step S676). If it is during the first period (step S676; Y), the first dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, which is the dispersion mode of the freeze effect, and the suspension timer until the freeze suspension is set (step S677), and step S681 is performed. Migrate to If it is not during the first period (step S676; N), it is determined whether it is during the second period (step S678).

  If it is during the second period (step S678; Y), the second dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, an interruption timer until the freeze interruption is set (step S679), and the process proceeds to step S681. Further, when it is not during the second period (step S678; N), that is, when it is during the third period, the third dispersion freeze is set as the dispersion freeze setting, and the suspension timer until the suspension of the freeze is set (step S680). Then, a reel effect operation process is performed in which the reel 6 is effected in a predetermined rotation manner in the dispersed manner of the selected freeze effect (step S681).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the interruption timer has reached 0, that is, the freeze interruption timing has come (step S682). Note that the value of the interruption timer is updated by -1 in the timer update process (step S28). If the value of the interruption timer is not 0 (step S682; N), the process returns to the reel effect operation process (step S681). When the value of the interruption timer becomes 0 (step S682; Y), a freeze effect switching command corresponding to the dispersion freeze setting is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S683). Then, the reel effect operation is stopped (step S684), and the long freeze processing is ended.

  Thereby, the effect variation display of the reel 6 is finished, and the normal variation display is set (S67 in FIG. 65). Thereafter, the stop operation becomes valid and a stop valid command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (S69 in FIG. 65). In this way, when the freeze state is interrupted, the effect change display is ended, so that it is possible to prevent obstructing the pressing operation of the reel 6 for which the stop operation is effective.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
Further, a reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. 68 is performed instead of the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, steps S691 to S695 are performed as a process related to the dispersion of the freeze effect. Note that the processing of steps S100 to S107 and S109 to S111 regarding the penalty freeze is not performed, but the processing regarding the penalty freeze may be performed.

  After transmitting a reel stop command corresponding to the reel stop information (step S99), it is determined whether there is a dispersion freeze setting (step S691). If there is no distributed freeze setting (step S691; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). When there is a dispersion freeze setting (step S691; Y), it is determined whether it is a stop invalidation timing for resuming the freeze effect (step S692).

  If it is not stop invalidation timing (step S692; N), it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). If it is the stop invalidation timing (step S692; Y), an invalid timer corresponding to the distributed freeze setting and the reel stop information is set (step S693), and it is determined whether the invalid timer has become 0 (step S694). ).

  As a result, the freeze effect can be resumed with the stop operation, and the freeze state can be fully experienced by restarting the freeze effect in this way. In addition, in the resumed freeze effect, the effect variation display (such as low-speed rotation and reverse rotation) of the reel 6 is not performed, and it is difficult to visually recognize the stop symbol due to the second variation of the reel 6 once stopped. I am trying not to. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the subsequent game progress is delayed. Furthermore, the time to confirm the stopped symbol can be secured by putting the reel 6 once stopped into the frozen state in the stopped state. However, the effect variation display may be performed on the reels 6 other than the reel 6 stopped by the stop operation.

  A value corresponding to the freeze time of the resumed freeze effect is set in the invalid timer, the value is updated by −1 in the timer update process (step S28), and the invalid timer value becomes zero. Until the next stop operation is invalid. Thereafter, when the invalid timer becomes 0 (step S694; Y), a distributed delimiter command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S695), and it is determined whether all reels that have stopped all reels have been stopped (step S108). ). If the reels are not completely stopped (step S108; N), the process returns to step S91. If the reels are all stopped (step S108; Y), the reel rotation stop process is terminated.

  In FIG. 69, the execution mode of the freeze effect at each dispersion freeze setting is shown. FIG. 69A shows an example in which the dispersion of the freeze effect is not selected. When the game is started with the game start operation, a freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t11). If the player does not perform a predetermined selection operation during this dispersible period (t11 to t12), the dispersion of the freeze effect is not set, and the freeze effect continues until the second half of the freeze period elapses (t13). Is done. Then, the stop operation can be performed at the end of the second half freeze period (t13), and the game is ended by performing the first stop operation (t14), the second stop operation (t15), and the third stop operation (t16).

  FIG. 69B shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the first period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t21). In the first period (t21 to t23) of the dispersible period, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect and there is an operation input based on this (t22), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A first dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the first dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the first period elapses (t23), and the first stop operation becomes effective after the first period elapses (t23). And if a player performs stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 1-1 which is the freeze production of predetermined time will be started (t24). When this distributed freeze effect period 1-1 elapses, the second stop operation becomes possible (t25).

  When the player performs a stop operation, a distributed freeze effect period 1-2, which is a freeze effect for a predetermined time, is started (t26). Thereafter, when the distributed freeze effect period 1-2 elapses, the third stop operation becomes possible (t27), and when the player performs a stop operation, the distributed freeze effect period 1-3, which is a freeze effect for a predetermined time, is started ( t28). When the distributed freeze effect period 1-3 elapses, the game ends (t29).

  It should be noted that the total value of the freeze effect time set in the first dispersion freeze, that is, the first period (t21 to t23), the dispersion freeze effect period 1-1 (t24 to t25), the dispersion freeze effect period 1-2 ( The total value of the times of t26 to t27) and the dispersion freeze effect period 1-3 (t28 to t29) is the same as the time of the freeze effect (t11 to t13) when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  FIG. 69 (c) shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the second period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t31). In the second period (t32 to t34), the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect, and when there is an operation input based on this (t33), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A second dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the second dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the second period elapses (t34), and the first stop operation becomes effective after the second period elapses (t34). And if a player performs stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 2-1 which is the freeze production of predetermined time will be started (t35). When this distributed freeze effect period 2-1 elapses, the second stop operation becomes possible (t36), and when the player performs a stop operation, a distributed freeze effect period 2-2 that is a freeze effect for a predetermined time is started ( t37). Thereafter, when the distributed freeze effect period 2-2 elapses, the third stop operation becomes possible (t38), and when the player performs the stop operation, the game ends (t39).

  It should be noted that the total value of the freeze effect time set in the second dispersion freeze, that is, the first period and the second period (t31 to t34), the dispersion freeze effect period 2-1 (t35 to t36) and the dispersion freeze effect period The total value of time 2-2 (t37 to t38) is the same as the time (t11 to t13) of the freeze effect when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  FIG. 69D shows a case where there is an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect during the third period. When the game is started with the game start operation, the freeze effect is started, and a dispersible period in which the dispersion of the freeze effect can be selected is started (t41). In the third period (t42 to t44) of the dispersible period, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation for selecting the dispersion of the freeze effect and there is an operation input based on this (t43), the dispersion freeze setting is set. A third dispersion freeze is selected.

  In the third dispersion freeze, the freeze effect is continued until the elapse of the third period (t44), and when the third period elapses, the first to third stop operations become effective (t44). When the player performs the first stop operation (t45), the second stop operation (t46), and the third stop operation (t47), the distributed freeze effect period 3 that is a freeze effect for a predetermined time is started (t47). ) When this distributed freeze effect period 3 elapses, the game ends (t48).

  In addition, the total value of the time of the freeze effect set in the third dispersion freeze, that is, the time of the first period, the second period and the third period (t41 to t44) and the time of the dispersion freeze effect period 3 (t47 to t48) The total value is the same as the time (t11 to t13) of the freeze effect when the freeze effect is not dispersed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing faster when the freeze state is interrupted, and to provide a player with a fair game.

  As described above, the freeze state is interrupted by an operation input based on a predetermined selection operation, and the change display can be stopped, so that the player feels bothered by the occurrence of the freeze state. This can be prevented. Further, by setting the dispersion mode of the freeze effect according to the period during which the predetermined selection operation has been performed, it becomes possible to select the distribution mode according to the player's preference. In addition, by dividing the dispersible period into the first to third periods, and allowing the stop operation after waiting for the end of the period during which the predetermined selection operation was performed, the dispersion freeze effect period set thereafter Time values and effect data can be set in advance, and the control burden can be reduced. By setting a dispersible period during which the freeze state can be interrupted, game characteristics are imparted to the interruption, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, it is good also as a dispersion | distribution aspect according to the said timing which interrupts a freezing effect at the arbitrary timings which there existed operation input, without dividing | segmenting a dispersible period into the 1st-3rd period. For example, the remaining time of the freeze effect is equally divided into two or three so as to be performed for each stop operation, or the remaining freeze effect is executed after all stop operations are completed. Further, the freeze effect may be terminated when there is an operation input.

  That is, the game control device 50 serves as a freeze state interruption means that can interrupt the freeze state based on a predetermined operation input during the occurrence of the freeze state. Further, the game control device 50 serves as an operation validation means for validating the stop operation based on the suspension of the freeze state.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display sections (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variation display. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variable display units so that a symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the stop operation of the variable display, the stop operation is predetermined based on the result of the internal lottery Freeze state generation means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that is invalid for a period of time, and the freeze state is interrupted based on a predetermined operation input during the generation of the freeze state Freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50) that can be made to operate, and operation enabling means (game control device) that makes the stop operation effective based on the interruption of the freeze state So that the includes a 50), the.

  Here, the predetermined operation input is an operation of the start lever 21, the bet button (max bet button 17), the stop button (reel stop button 24), or the like.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is configured to resume the interrupted freeze state based on the fact that the stop operation that has been enabled by the operation enabling means (game control device 50) has been performed. Will be.

  Further, the freeze state generating means (game control device 50) is the same as the case where the freeze state period is not interrupted even when the freeze state is interrupted by the freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50). The freeze state is resumed so as to reach the period.

  In addition, the freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) is configured to interrupt the freeze state when an operation input is made within a preset valid period in the freeze state.

  In addition, it is provided with effect change display means (game control device 50) capable of causing the change display section (reel 6) to perform predetermined effect change display during occurrence of the freeze state. When the freeze state is interrupted by the means (the game control device 50), the effect variation display is ended to shift to the normal variation display.

  Further, the effect change display means (game control device 50) is configured not to restart the effect change display even when the freeze state is restarted.

  The freeze state generating means (game control device 50) can generate a plurality of types of freeze states having different lengths, and the freeze state interrupting means (game control device 50) has a freeze state longer than a predetermined length. If this occurs, the freeze state can be interrupted.

[Freeze production process]
The effect control device 70 performs a freeze effect process shown in FIG. 70 in place of the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this freeze effect process, if it is not an operation-freeze freeze (step S244), it is determined whether it is a short freeze (step S701). Here, the short freeze is a freeze effect with a freeze time of less than 60 seconds.

  If this is a short freeze (step S701; Y), a short freeze effect process is performed (step S702), and the freeze effect process is terminated. The short freeze effect process (step S702) is the same process as the normal freeze effect process (step S245). On the other hand, when it is not a short freeze (step S701; N), a long freeze effect process is performed (step S703), and a freeze effect process is complete | finished. In the long freeze effect process (step S703), a process related to the setting of the effect accompanying the dispersion of the freeze effect is performed.

[Long freeze production processing]
FIG. 71 shows a long freeze effect process in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this long freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether or not an operation suggestion command transmitted in the dispersible period has been received (step S711). If this operation suggestion command has not been received (step S711; N), the process proceeds to step S713.

  When an operation suggestion command is received (step S711; Y), an operation suggestion notification is executed (step S712). The operation suggestion notification is, for example, a display for prompting a predetermined selection operation for dispersing the freeze effect on the image display device 3 or a display for notifying which of the first to third periods is performed. It is.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a freeze switching command including information related to the set distributed freeze setting and transmitted at the timing of interrupting the freeze effect from the start of the game has been received (step S713). When this freeze switching command is received (step S713; Y), the dispersion freeze effect corresponding to the set dispersion freeze setting is set (step S714), the freeze effect is terminated (step S716), and the long freeze effect is set. End the process. That is, a special display effect that is a display effect that can be executed in the freeze effect is interrupted when the freeze state is interrupted.

  On the other hand, if the freeze switching command has not been received (step S713; N), it is determined whether a freeze end command transmitted at the end of the freeze effect has been received (step S715). If the freeze end command has not been received (step S715; N), the process returns to step S711. When the freeze end command is received (step S715; Y), the freeze effect is ended (step S716), and the long freeze effect process is ended.

  FIG. 72 shows an execution pattern of a 60-second freeze effect in the slot machine of this modification. Four types of freeze effects A to D are prepared for the 60-second freeze effect. Freeze effects A to C can be selected as immediate freeze that performs freeze effects in a game for which execution of freeze effects has been determined, and freeze effect D can be selected as a game several games after the game for which execution of freeze effects has been determined. This is a freeze effect that can be selected only in a standby freeze (where the operation-mediated freeze effect is excluded).

  Also, the freeze effect A can be selected only in the normal game state, and the freeze effect B can be selected only in the specific game state. These are effects that do not involve the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8). The freeze effects C and D can be selected in either the normal game state or the specific game state, and are effects accompanied by the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8).

  In the freeze effects A to C, four types of patterns are prepared according to the dispersion freeze setting. In the case of standby freeze, since the dispersion of the freeze effect cannot be selected, the freeze effect D has only one type of pattern. Pattern 1 is an execution pattern when the distributed freeze setting is not performed, and pattern 2 is an execution pattern when the first distributed freeze is set. Pattern 3 is an execution pattern when the second distributed freeze is set, and pattern 4 is an execution pattern when the third distributed freeze is set.

  In FIG. 73, the execution mode of the freeze effect in each execution pattern in the freeze effect C is shown. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the pattern 1, a character A viewpoint movie that is an effect mainly of the character A is displayed in the first period in the dispersible period, and the character B is mainly used in the second period. A character B viewpoint movie that is an effect is displayed, and a character C viewpoint movie that is an effect mainly of the character C in the third period is displayed. Thereafter, in the non-distributable period (second half freeze period), the mixed movies of characters A, B, and C in which characters A to C appear are displayed.

  This pattern 1 is set at the start of the freeze effect. Then, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the first period in which the character A viewpoint movie is displayed, a first dispersion freeze is set, and a process of setting a dispersion freeze effect corresponding to the set dispersion freeze setting ( In step S714), the transition to the execution pattern of pattern 2 is set. Further, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation during the second period in which the character B viewpoint movie is displayed, the second distributed freeze is set and the transition to the execution pattern of pattern 3 is set. Furthermore, when the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the third period in which the character C viewpoint movie is displayed, the third distributed freeze is set and the transition to the execution pattern of the pattern 4 is set. The freeze effect C is an effect accompanied by the action of the accessory (movable effect device 8), but the action of the accessory is performed in the final effect period regardless of the pattern. .

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (b) to 73 (d), in patterns 2 to 4, the player makes a predetermined selection during the production period that is performed after the period during which the predetermined selection operation has been performed, with the stop effective period in between. An effect corresponding to the character that was the main character during the operation period is performed. That is, by selecting a period during which the player performs a predetermined selection operation in the dispersible period, it is possible to select the contents of the effect of the subsequent freeze effect.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to show a special display effect of a different effect pattern between when the freeze state is not interrupted and when it is interrupted, thereby improving the interest of the game. Moreover, since the special effect pattern changes according to the timing of interruption of the freeze state, game characteristics are given to the interruption, and the interest of the game is improved.

  That is, the display effect in pattern 1 is a normal effect pattern that is executed when the freeze state is not interrupted, and the display effect that is performed in each of the distributed freeze effect periods in patterns 2 to 4 is resumed after the freeze state is interrupted. A special performance pattern that is executed when the Further, the special effect patterns are different in the contents of the effects, and either one is selected according to the timing when the freeze state is interrupted.

  Similarly, freeze effects A and B display a character A viewpoint movie in the first period, a character B viewpoint movie in the second period, and a character C viewpoint movie in the third period. Then, the character A, B, C mixed movie is displayed in the non-dispersible period (second half freeze period) in pattern 1. Further, in patterns 2 to 4, after the period in which the predetermined selection operation was performed, in the effect period performed with the stop effective period in between, the player was mainly in the period in which the player performed the predetermined selection operation. An effect corresponding to the character is performed. As described above, the types of characters that can be selected are the same in freeze effects A to C, but the contents of effects such as stories are different. Of course, the selectable characters for the freeze effects A to C may be different.

  In addition, as described above, the dispersible period is divided into the first to third periods, and after the end of the period when the predetermined selection operation has been performed, the stop operation can be performed and then set. It is possible to set the time value of the distributed freeze effect period in advance, and it is sufficient to prepare single video data as a movie for each effect period, and the control burden can be reduced.

[AT standby processing]
Further, the AT standby processing shown in FIG. 74 is performed instead of the AT standby processing shown in FIG. In this AT standby process, after the reel stop information is updated (step S353), it is determined whether there is a distributed freeze effect setting (step S721). If there is no distributed freeze effect setting (step S721; N), The game effect is updated based on the stop information (step S354).

  If there is a distributed freeze effect setting (step S721; Y), it is determined whether it is a stop invalidation timing for restarting the freeze effect (step S722), and if it is not a stop invalidation timing (step S722; N). Then, the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354). If it is the stop invalidation timing (step S722; Y), the corresponding distributed freeze effect is set (step S723), the distributed freeze effect is updated (step S724), and the distributed freeze effect period ends. It is determined whether or not the distributed delimiter command transmitted to is received (step S725). That is, a special display effect that is a display effect that can be executed in the freeze effect is resumed based on the restart of the freeze state. Thereby, it can prevent that the presentation effect in the resumed frozen state falls.

  If the distributed delimiter command has not been received (step S725; N), the process returns to the process of updating the distributed freeze effect (step S724). Further, when the distribution break command is received (step S725; Y), the game effect is updated based on the reel stop information (step S354).

  It should be noted that the normal / precursor processing shown in FIG. 35, the promotion / rush-in AT processing shown in FIG. 40, the extra AT processing shown in FIG. 42, the repair AT processing shown in FIG. 45, and the processing shown in FIG. Also in the transition chance processing, the processing shown in steps S721 to S724 is performed after the reel stop information is updated. If an irregular stop operation occurs during normal / precursor processing, or if there is an assist violation during promotion / rush-in AT processing, extra AT processing, or relief AT processing, the progress of distributed freeze production stops Or output a warning sound or display a warning.

  FIG. 75 shows an example of the effect when the predetermined selection operation is performed in the second period in the freeze effect in which the freeze effect C is selected and the second dispersion freeze is set. As shown in FIG. 75A, when the start operation is performed from the state in which the previous game is finished and a predetermined background image is displayed, the game is started and a freeze effect is produced as shown in FIG. It is started and the stop operation is disabled.

  When the freeze effect is started, first, the first period of the dispersible period is started and the character A viewpoint movie is displayed. In this character A viewpoint movie, an effect image mainly composed of the character A is displayed, and it is notified that an effect mainly composed of the character A can be selected as a distributed freeze effect by performing a predetermined operation input.

  When the first period elapses and the second period is reached, the character B viewpoint movie is displayed as shown in FIG. In this character B viewpoint movie, an effect image mainly composed of the character B is displayed, and it is informed that an effect mainly composed of the character B can be selected as a distributed freeze effect by performing a predetermined operation input. Here, the player performs a predetermined operation input in the second period, and based on this, the second distributed freeze is set, and the stop operation becomes effective after the second period elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (d), in the period in which the stop operation is valid, the corresponding character B movie distributed joint images are displayed as the effects connecting the preceding and succeeding effects. And if a player performs 1st stop operation, the dispersion | distribution freeze production period 2-1 will be started and stop operation will become invalid. As shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (f), in this distributed freeze effect period 2-1, the character B main movie 1 mainly composed of the character B is displayed and stopped when the distributed freeze effect period 2-1 has elapsed. The operation becomes valid.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (g), the corresponding character B movie distributed continuous image is displayed as an effect that connects the preceding and succeeding effects even during the period when the stop operation is valid. Then, when the player performs the second stop operation, the distributed freeze effect period 2-2 is started and the stop operation becomes invalid. As shown in FIGS. 75 (h) and 75 (i), the character B main movie 2 mainly composed of the character B is displayed in the distributed freeze effect period 2-2. In addition, since the dispersion freeze effect period 2-2 is the final effect period, an effect by the operation of the movable effect device 8 is performed as shown in FIG. 75 (i).

  Then, when the dispersion freeze effect period 2-2 elapses, the stop operation becomes effective, and as shown in FIG. 75 (j), it is notified that the character B has won the special prize by indicating that the character B has won the battle as the final effect. Is done. When the player performs the third stop operation, it is clearly notified that the game is over and that the player has won a special prize as shown in FIG. 75 (k).

  From the above, a plurality of variation display sections (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with a variation display. In a slot machine that performs stop control of a plurality of variable display units so that a symbol combination mode according to the result of the internal lottery can be derived based on the stop operation of the variable display, the stop operation is predetermined based on the result of the internal lottery Freeze state generating means (game control device 50) capable of generating a freeze state that is invalidated over a period of time, a predetermined display effect can be performed during the execution of the game, and the occurrence of the freeze state Display effect means (effect control device 70) capable of performing a special display effect, and the freeze state based on the presence of a predetermined operation input during the occurrence of the freeze state Freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) that can be interrupted, and operation validation means (game control device 50) that validates the stop operation based on the interruption of the freeze state. It will be.

  Here, the predetermined operation input is an operation of the start lever 21, the bet button (max bet button 17), the stop button (reel stop button 24), or the like.

  Further, the display effect means (effect control device 70) interrupts the special display effect based on the freeze state being interrupted, and restarts the special display effect based on the restart of the freeze state. Will be.

  The display effect means (effect control device 70) executes a special display effect in the normal effect pattern when the freeze state is not interrupted, and switches to the special effect pattern when the freeze state is interrupted and resumed. The special display effect is resumed.

  Further, a plurality of special effect patterns are set so that the contents of the effects are different, and the display effect means (effect control device 70) selects any of the plurality of special effect patterns according to the timing when the freeze state is interrupted. The special display effect is resumed with the selected special effect pattern.

  In addition, a progress operation unit for advancing the game is provided, and the progress operation unit includes a bet number operation unit (max bet button 17) for setting the bet number on the game and a start operation unit for starting the game. Including a (start lever 21) and a stop operation unit (reel stop button 24) for performing a stop operation. The freeze state interruption means (game control device 50) operates the betting number operation unit in the progress operation unit. The freeze state is interrupted based on the input.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification can automatically stop the reel 6 when no stop operation is performed for a predetermined period.

[Reel rotation stop processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this modification, a reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. 76 is performed instead of the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this reel rotation stop process, if there is no stop button operation (step S91; N), an automatic stop control process (step S731) is performed. Note that the processing of steps S100 to S107 and S109 to S111 regarding the penalty freeze is not performed, but the processing regarding the penalty freeze may be performed.

[Automatic stop control processing]
FIG. 77 shows an automatic stop control process in the reel rotation stop process shown in FIG. In this automatic stop control process, first, it is determined whether the automatic stop period has elapsed. The passage of the automatic stop period means that a predetermined time (period) started from the previous effective operation for the start lever 21 or the reel stop button 24 has elapsed. If the automatic stop period has not elapsed (step S741; N), the automatic stop control process ends. If the automatic stop period has elapsed (step S741; Y), it is determined whether the RT state (RT state 1 or 2) is in progress (step S742).

  If it is in the RT state (step S742; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S748), and the automatic stop control process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the automatic stop may cause a fall condition to be disadvantageous to the player, or a rush replay winning may be established to be advantageous to the player. In the production control device 70, for example, based on the reception of the stop urging command, a display for urging the reel 6 to stop is performed on the image display device 3, for example.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT state (step S742; N), it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is a loss (pure loss) (step S743). When the result of the internal lottery is a loss (step S743; Y), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S750), and the changing reel stop process (stopping one changing reel 6) (step S750). Step S751) is performed. In the case of losing, even if the game is automatically stopped so as to be lost, there is no disadvantage to the player, and the game can be smoothly advanced by the automatic stop.

  If the result of the internal lottery is not lost (step S743; N), it is determined whether the winning combination is won (step S744). A missed winning combination is a winning combination other than a normal replay winning, a middle bell winning (Bell G) and an upper bell winning (three-piece F) that are final winnings that are established regardless of the player's stop operation mode. Thus, it indicates a non-determined winning combination in which no winning is achieved depending on the stop operation mode of the player. When the winning winning combination is won (step S744; Y), reel stop information is acquired (step S745), and it is determined whether the winning decision stop state is set (step S746). The winning confirmed stop state is a state in which a winning is confirmed regardless of the stopping order and stopping symbols of the reel 6 that is changing, for example, a one-piece role A winning composed of a combination of ANY, cherry, and ANY symbols. Is the case where the internal reel 6b has already stopped in a state where the cherry is led out.

  If it is not in the winning fixed stop state (step S746; N), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S750), and a changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (step S751). )I do. In the process of setting the loss stop mode based on the reel stop information (step S750), the stop order and stop timing (stop symbol) of the reel 6 are set, and the game result is set to be lost. In other words, for non-determined winning combinations that may be missed, the player will not be overly dissatisfied even if it is automatically stopped so that it will not win, so that it will not be realized, so It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding smoothly.

  Here, an irregular stop operation is performed when the left reel 6a is not first stopped. Therefore, when all reels 6 are changing, the stop order is set to the left, middle, and right so that the irregular stop operation (abnormal order) does not occur. In this order (so-called forward pressing), the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a penalty state occurs due to the automatic stop. However, when the push order bell winning established by forward pressing is won, the stop order is left, right, and middle (so-called scissors pressing) so that the bell winning is not established.

  Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, if you win the push-bell prize, which is established by pushing forward, the stop order will be right and middle so that scissors are pushed. If the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is left and right, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, in this stop order, if a push order bell prize is established, the stop order is set to the right and left. If the right reel 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. However, in this stop order, if a push order bell winning is established, the stop order is set to middle and left. In addition, you may set a stop order so that it may become scissors pushing fundamentally.

  On the other hand, if the winning decision stop state is set (step S746; Y) or if the winning combination is not won (step S744; N), it is determined whether the state transition replay is won (step S747). The state transition replay is a promotion replay prize, a fall replay prize, and a rush replay prize.

  When this state transition replay is won (step S747; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S748), and the automatic stop control process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the automatic stop may be disadvantageous or advantageous to the player. This prevents a situation in which a promotion role does not shift to a specific gaming state without winning a prize due to an automatic stop, or a situation in which a demoted role wins and demotes to a normal gaming state. be able to.

  If the state transition replay is not won (step S747; N), the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the reel stop information (step S749), and one reel 6 that is changing is stopped. A changing reel stop process (step S751) is performed. In other words, since there is no possibility of a transition of the gaming state unintended by the player, even if the automatic stop, the interest of the game will not be attenuated, and if the final winning combination is won, By automatically stopping the final winning combination so that the player can win, it is possible to smoothly advance the game without any disadvantage to the player.

  In the process of setting the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination based on the reel stop information (step S749), the stop order of the reels 6 is sequentially pushed (left, middle, right) in order to avoid an irregular stop operation. Set as follows. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a penalty state occurs due to the automatic stop. Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and when the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is set to left and right, and the right reel If 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle. Here, since it is a stop state where a winning combination that has not been missed is won or the winning is confirmed, it is not necessary to set the stop timing (stop symbol). Further, the stop order may be scissors push (left, right, middle). In addition, in the state where it is already determined that the operation is an irregular stop operation, the stop order may be arbitrarily set.

  Thereafter, an automatic reel stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S752), and it is determined whether there is a reel that is changing (step S753). If there is a changing reel (step S753; Y), the process returns to the changing reel stop process (step S751). If there is no reel that is changing (step S753; N), the automatic stop control process is terminated. That is, the game control device 50 can automatically stop the variation display unit (reel 6) during the variation display based on the fact that the stop operation is not performed for a predetermined period during the execution of the game. Make. By performing such automatic stop, it is possible to perform automatic stop so that the player does not feel excessive dissatisfaction, and the game progresses smoothly. Moreover, it becomes possible to suggest the result of an internal lottery by not performing an automatic stop.

  Although the automatic stop is not performed when the state transition replay is won, the presence / absence of the automatic stop may be determined according to the type of replay winning that has been established. For example, the automatic stop may not be performed when the promotion combination for switching to the gaming state advantageous to the player is won, and the automatic stop may be performed in other cases. On the contrary, the automatic stop may not be performed when the demotion combination to switch to the gaming state disadvantageous to the player is won, and the automatic stop may be performed in other cases.

  Furthermore, when a transition combination in which the game state is shifted is won, it may be automatically stopped so as to be advantageous to the player. For example, if you are elected to a promotion role that switches to a gaming state advantageous to the player, you are automatically stopped so that the promotion role is established, and you are elected to a relegation role that switches to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player May be automatically stopped when the relegation combination is not established.

  From the above, a plurality of variation display units (reel 6) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols, and a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of a game with the variation display. When the result of the game stopped based on the variable display stop operation becomes a symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery, in the slot machine where the winning combination of the winning combination is established, during a predetermined period during the game execution Based on the fact that the stop operation is not performed for a long time, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) capable of automatically stopping the fluctuation display portion during the fluctuation display and the predetermined winning combination winning combination are established. Based on the game state switching means (game control device 50, effect control device 70) capable of switching the game state between a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, For example, the automatic stopping means, so that you have to determine whether to perform the automatic stop on the basis of the result and the game state of the internal lottery.

  Here, the normal gaming state is, for example, an AT state in which assistance information for establishing a small role is provided, an RT state in which the winning probability of replay winning is increased, or an ART state in which these are combined. The state is, for example, an AT state, an RT state, or an ART state. However, it is sufficient that the specific game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the normal game state and the specific game are targeted only for the occurrence of any one of the AT state, the RT state, or the ART state. You may make it distinguish a state.

  The transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The automatic stop means (game control device 50) In the gaming state, when the promotion combination is won, automatic stop is not performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) performs automatic stop when it is in the normal gaming state and the transition combination is not won.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) is in the normal gaming state, and when the final winning combination in which a winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the player is won, As a result, an automatic stop is performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) is in the normal gaming state, and when the non-determined winning combination that is not established depending on the stop operation mode of the player is won, An automatic stop is made so as not to win a prize.

  The transitional combination includes a promotion combination for switching the gaming state to the specific gaming state and a demoted combination for switching the gaming state to the normal gaming state. The automatic stop means (game control device 50) In the gaming state, when the demoted combination is elected, automatic stop is not performed.

  In addition, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) performs automatic stop so as to be in the lost symbol combination mode when winning is lost regardless of whether it is in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state. It will be like that.

  Further, an irregular stop operation determining means (game control device 50) for determining occurrence of an irregular stop operation in which a plurality of variation display units stop in a predetermined irregular order, and a disadvantage to the player based on the occurrence of the irregular stop operation. Penalty state generating means (production control device 70) capable of generating a penalty state over a plurality of games, and the automatic stop means (game control device 50) in an order that does not become an irregular order. This means that the fluctuation display section during fluctuation display is automatically stopped.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the slot machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the second modified example, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification can be automatically stopped even in the RT state.

[Automatic stop control processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this modification, an automatic stop control process shown in FIG. 78 is performed instead of the automatic stop control process shown in FIG. In this automatic stop control process, when not in the RT state (step S742; N), the normal automatic stop process is performed, and the automatic stop control process ends. This normal automatic stop processing is the processing of steps S743 to S753 in FIG. That is, when not in the RT state, the same processing as that in FIG. 77 is performed. If it is in the RT state (step S742; Y), an automatic stop process during RT (step S761) is performed, and the automatic stop control process ends.

[Automatic stop processing during RT]
FIG. 79 shows an automatic stop process during RT in the automatic stop control process shown in FIG. In the automatic stop process during RT, first, it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is a loss (pure loss) (step S771). If the result of the internal lottery is a loss (step S771; Y), the stop mode of the loss is set based on the reel stop information (step S772), and the changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (Step S778) is performed. If the result of the internal lottery is not lost (step S771; N), it is determined whether a penalty target combination is being won (step S773).

  A penalty-winning combination is a winning combination in which a falling condition is established in which an RT state or an AT state is terminated by being established or missed. Here, a falling replay winning and a SIN winning in which a falling condition is established by winning Then, it is a push order bell winning prize in which the falling condition is established by missing. When this penalty target combination is being won (step S773; Y), a stop prompting command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S781), and the RT automatic stop process is terminated. In this case, the automatic stop is not performed because the fall condition may be satisfied by the automatic stop, which may be disadvantageous to the player. By this. It can be prevented that the gaming state is shifted in a state not intended by the player and the interest of the game is attenuated. In the production control device 70, for example, based on the reception of the stop urging command, a display for urging the reel 6 to stop is performed on the image display device 3, for example.

  On the other hand, if the winning combination is not being won (step S773; N), reel stop information is acquired (step S774), and it is determined whether the winning decision stop state is set (step S775). The winning confirmed stop state is a state in which a winning is confirmed regardless of the stopping order and stopping symbols of the reel 6 that is changing, for example, a one-piece role A winning composed of a combination of ANY, cherry, and ANY symbols. Is the case where the internal reel 6b has already stopped in a state where the cherry is led out. In addition, since the winning is always established when the normal replay winning, middle bell winning (bell G) and upper bell winning (three-piece F) are won, the winning is confirmed even if all reels 6 are changing. Set to the stopped state.

  If it is not in the winning fixed stop state (step S775; N), a lost stop mode is set based on the reel stop information (step S777), and the changing reel stop process for stopping one changing reel 6 (step S778). )I do. In the process of setting the loss stop mode based on the reel stop information (step S777), the reel 6 stop order and stop timing (stop symbol) are set, and the game result is set to be lost.

  Since there is no irregular stop operation here, any stop order may be used. However, when all reels 6 are changing, the stop order is left, middle, and right (so-called forward pressing), and the stop timing corresponds to winning. The timing when the symbol combination to be formed cannot be formed. Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and the stop timing is set to a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed.

  If the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is left and right, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed. If the right reel 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle, and the stop timing is a timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning cannot be formed.

  On the other hand, if the winning decision stop state is set (step S775; Y), a winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the reel stop information (step S776), and the change of stopping one reel 6 being changed is stopped. A middle reel stop process (step S778) is performed. In the process of setting the winning stop mode corresponding to the winning combination based on the reel stop information (step S778), the reels 6 are set so that the stop order of the reels 6 is forward (left, middle, right). Further, when the left reel 6a has already stopped, the stop order is set to middle and right so as to be pushed forward, and when the middle reel 6b has already stopped, the stop order is set to left and right, and the right reel If 6c has already stopped, the stop order is left and middle. Since there is no irregular stop operation here, another stop order may be used.

  Thereafter, an automatic reel stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S779), and it is determined whether there is a reel that is changing (step S780). If there is a changing reel (step S780; Y), the process returns to the changing reel stop process (step S778). If there is no reel that is changing (step S780; N), the automatic stop process during RT ends. Note that even when the push order wins a prize as a penalty target combination is won, the two reels are already stopped according to the push order, and if the winning is confirmed, automatic stop may be performed.

  From the above, the automatic stop means (game control device 50) prevents automatic stop when the transition combination is won regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state. It will be.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the second embodiment will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. The slot machine of this embodiment includes a lower decoration device 120 at a position where the decoration plate 25 is disposed.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the lower decoration device 120 decorates the lower area of the front frame 2 with a decorative pattern in the same manner as the decorative board 25, but the decoration is made according to the progress of the game. It is possible to change the pattern. For example, during a normal game, a decorative picture with a model name is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (a), and during the period when live video is played on the image display device 3, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern on which the character “medium” is drawn is displayed. In addition, it can be changed to various decorative patterns depending on the game situation. In this way, it is possible to perform various effects display in the area where the decorative board 25 with a large display area is arranged, so that an effective effect can be performed for a player who is playing a game, Notification can be given to a player who is far away, and a high performance effect can be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the lower decoration device 120 includes a rectangular box-shaped main body 121 that houses therein a decoration member 130 and the like on which a decorative pattern is drawn. A rectangular front window portion 122 in which a transparent member is fitted is formed on the front surface of the main body portion 121, and the decorative member 130 on which a decorative pattern is drawn is visible through the front window portion 122. ing. Further, the upper and lower surfaces of the main body 121 are respectively formed with rotating shafts 123 extending vertically. With the rotating shaft 123, the lower decoration device 120 is pivotally attached to the front frame 2. Is done.

  A front opening 140 (see FIG. 80A) into which a transparent member is fitted is formed in the front frame 2 corresponding to the front window 122 of the lower decoration device 120, and the front frame 2 is closed to play a game. In this state, the player can visually recognize the decorative pattern drawn on the decorative member 130 facing the front window 122 through the front opening 140. In addition, an opening / closing door 124 is provided on the side surface of the main body 121 so that internal maintenance such as replacement of the decorative member 130 can be easily performed.

  As shown in FIG. 82, an upper rotation shaft 125 and a lower rotation shaft 126 are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the main body 121 inside the main body 121. The upper rotation shaft 125 is disposed near the upper end of the front window portion 122, and the lower rotation shaft 126 is disposed near the lower end of the front window portion 122. A loop-shaped decorative member 130 made of a material that can transmit light and having a width wider than the left and right widths of the front window portion 122 is wound between the rotating shafts. A plurality of decorative patterns that match the size of the front window portion 122 are drawn on the decorative member 130 so as to line up in the circumferential direction.

  Inside the main body 121, a driving device (not shown) that rotationally drives the upper rotating shaft 125 or the lower rotating shaft 126 is provided, and the upper rotating shaft 125 or the lower rotating shaft 126 is rotated by this driving device. By driving, the loop-shaped decorative member 130 can be circulated, and the decorative pattern that is visible from the front window portion 122 can be changed.

  Further, a detection sensor 127 for controlling the position of the decorative pattern is provided inside the main body 121. The detection sensor 127 may be any type. For example, an optical sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged to face each other and a signal is output based on detection of light by the light receiving unit can be used. In this case, a side end portion of the decorative member 130 that is not visible from the front window portion 122 is used as a detection region, and the detection region is processed so as not to transmit light, and penetrates the front and back at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction. A plurality of through holes are provided. Then, the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the optical sensor are arranged across the detection region, and the amount of movement of the decorative member 130 is grasped based on the number of signal outputs in the circulation operation.

  The through hole may be formed so that a signal is output in a state where the decorative pattern is in a predetermined position, and the circulation operation may be stopped based on the detection of the signal. Further, the position of the decorative pattern may be controlled by detecting the rotation phase of the upper rotation shaft 125 or the lower rotation shaft 126, or a stepping motor is used as the motor of the driving device to control the rotation phase of the motor. By doing so, the position of the decorative pattern may be controlled.

  Also, a lower light emitting device 128 that illuminates the decorative member 130 facing the front window 122 from the back side is provided inside the main body 121 and between the upper rotating shaft 125 and the lower rotating shaft 126. . The lower light emitting device 128 has a plate shape that is large enough to cover the rear of the front window 122, and is disposed so as to face the front window 122 with the decorative member 130 interposed therebetween. A plurality of light emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the surface of the lower light emitting device 128 on the front window portion 122 side.

  The upper rotating shaft 125 and the lower rotating shaft 126 can be attached to and detached from the main body 121, and can be attached and detached together with the decorative member 130 wound around them. Thereby, the decoration member 130 can be replaced | exchanged easily. In addition, since the decoration member 130 can be replaced while the lower light emitting device 128 and the like remain in the main body 121, it is the same as the introduction of a new machine with the same model and a different decoration (a new version of the same model with a different version). Can be obtained at low cost.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the lower decoration device 120 has a rotation shaft 123 on the side where the shaft of the hinge 2a for pivotally mounting the front frame 2 to the housing 1a is provided. It is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be held. As a result, with the pivot shaft 123 as the center, it is accommodated in the front frame 2 as shown in FIG. 83 (a) and rotated to the rear of the front frame 2 as shown in FIG. 83 (c). Conversion is possible. In the state where the front frame 2 is closed and the game is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the lower decoration device 120 is fixed while being accommodated in the front frame 2, and the front window portion 122 of the lower decoration device 120 is played. It faces the front facing the person and coincides with the front opening 140 of the front frame 2 and is visible from the front side of the decorative pattern (see FIG. 80).

  Further, since the lower decoration device 120 can be fixed in the state of being accommodated in the front frame 2, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the front frame 2 is opened to replenish medals or in the housing 1a. When performing maintenance, the lower decoration device 120 does not get in the way, and workability is not impaired. 83C, the lower decoration device 120 is released from the front frame 2 as shown in FIG. 83D by releasing the fixing of the lower decoration device 120 with the front frame 2 opened. The door 124 can be opened in this state, and the decorative member 130 can be removed together with the upper rotating shaft 125 and the lower rotating shaft 126. And the decoration member 130 can be replaced | exchanged by attaching the new decoration member 130 to the upper rotating shaft 125 and the lower rotating shaft 126, and attaching again.

  From the above, the decorative member 130 is made of a material capable of transmitting light at least at the portion on which the decorative pattern is drawn, and the lower decorative device 120 is arranged with respect to the decorative member 130 disposed at a position visible to the player. Thus, the lower light emitting device 128 that irradiates light from the back surface side is provided, and the decorative member 130 can be removed and replaced while the lower light emitting device 128 remains.

  The light emitting member provided in the lower light emitting device 128 can irradiate the decoration member 130 with either red light or blue light, and the decoration member 130 transmits red light on the same surface. The decorative pattern that can be visually recognized differs when blue light is transmitted. In addition, the decorative member 130 has two surfaces, A and B, as display surfaces, and four types of decorative images can be displayed by switching the display surface by circulation operation and switching the emission color.

  As shown in FIG. 84, on the surface A, the decorative pattern on which the model name is drawn is visible when red light is transmitted, and the decorative pattern indicating the character A is visible when blue light is transmitted. . On the B side, a decorative pattern on which a character “in performance” is drawn is visible when red light is transmitted, and a decorative pattern indicating the character B is visible when blue light is transmitted. . By setting it as such a structure, it becomes possible to change the decoration pattern in a lower panel part with a simple structure, and effective decoration can be implement | achieved at low cost.

  The type of decorative pattern that can be viewed is changed according to the display on the image display device 3. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), when a plurality of characters are displayed on the image display device 3 or when an image unrelated to the characters is displayed, as shown in FIG. 85 (c). In the lower decoration device 120, the decorative pattern on which the model name is drawn is in a visible state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), as the display on the image display device 3 is switched to the video mainly composed of the character A, the lower decoration device 120 can visually recognize it as shown in FIG. 85 (d). The decorative pattern to be switched is switched to a decorative pattern indicating the character A. In this case, the decorative pattern is switched by switching the emission color of the light emitting member from red to blue. In addition, when switching from the display of the model name to the decorative pattern of the character B, the decorative member 130 is operated by the driving device so that the B surface faces the front window portion 122 and the emission color is switched from red to blue.

  FIG. 86 is a block diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the control system of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The effect control device 70 receives a signal from the detection sensor 127 of the lower decoration device 120 and the effect control device 70 transmits a control signal to the drive device of the lower decoration device 120 to control the motor. It is like that. Further, the effect control device 70 also controls the lower light emitting device 128 provided in the lower decoration device 120.

[Character selection processing]
In the effect control device, the character selection processing shown in FIG. 87 is performed in the display control processing (step S224) in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 17 as control for linking the image display device 3 and the lower decoration device 120. This character selection process is performed, for example, at a timing when an effect mainly consisting of a specific character is started as a game effect according to the progress of the game. In this character selection process, first, a process of determining whether the main character is A or B is performed (step S801).

  If the main character is A, a decorative pattern indicating the character A is set as a display of the lower decorative device 120 (step S802), and a display mainly having the character A is set as a display of the image display device 3. (Step S803). In the process of setting the decorative pattern indicating the character A as the display of the lower decoration device 120 (step S802), a process of setting the display surface facing the front window portion 122 as the A plane and the emission color of the lower light emission device 128 as blue is performed. .

  On the other hand, if the main character is B, a decorative pattern indicating the character B is set as the display of the lower decorative device 120 (step S804), and the display with the character B as the main is displayed as the display of the image display device 3. Setting is performed (step S805). In the process of setting the decorative pattern indicating the character B as the display of the lower decoration device 120 (step S804), a process is performed in which the display surface facing the front window 122 is the B surface and the emission color of the lower light emission device 128 is blue. .

  By such processing, the display of the lower decoration device 120 is changed in conjunction with the change of the display on the image display device 3. Thereby, the display of the lower panel portion can also be changed according to the display content of the image display device 3, the uniform decoration can be performed in the entire gaming machine, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. That is, the effect control device 70 is a lower decoration control device that controls the lower decoration device 120. Note that the change in the display of the lower decoration device 120 in conjunction with the display of the image display device 3 is not limited to the execution of the game, but may be performed while waiting for a customer, for example. Further, the game control device 50 may control the lower decoration device 120.

  As described above, a variable display unit (reel 6) that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided, and a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value according to a stop result of the variable display unit is performed. In the gaming machine, a lower decoration device 120 provided below the variable display portion and provided with a decoration member 130 on which a decorative pattern is drawn so as to be visible to the player, and a lower decoration for controlling the lower decoration device 120 The lower decoration device 120 includes a drive device that operates the decoration member 130, and the decoration member 130 is operated by the drive device, so that the player can visually recognize the lower decoration device 120. The decoration pattern can be changed, and the lower decoration control device can change the decoration pattern that is visible to the player by operating the driving device in association with at least the progress of the game. To become.

  In addition, an effect display unit (image display device 3) that performs display for producing a game is provided, and the lower decoration control device (effect control device 70) operates the driving device in relation to the display content of the effect display unit to play the game. It is possible to change the decorative pattern that is visible to the person.

  Note that the display content of the decorative pattern and the timing of changing the decorative pattern in the lower decorative device can be arbitrarily set. For example, the decorative pattern is changed in a freeze effect that is an effect of invalidating the operation of the reel stop button 24 or the like for a predetermined time, or the decorative pattern is changed according to the effect operation of the reel 6 during the freeze effect. Also good. In addition, the decorative picture may be changed by an operation of a store clerk of the game store, and information that serves as a reference for selecting a gaming machine may be provided to the player depending on the type of the decorative picture.

  In addition, the decorative pattern is drawn on each of the A side and the B side to display either one. However, the decorative pattern is longer than the vertical width of the front window 122 along the circumferential direction without providing a partition of the display surface. You may make it draw a picture and show a decorative picture sequentially by continuous circulation operation | movement. Moreover, although the decorative pattern which can be visually recognized is changed by the luminescent color of the lower light-emitting device 128, you may make it change a decorative pattern only by circulation operation | movement of a decorative member. In addition, information related to the game such as the expectation of winning the special prize may be notified by the color of light emitted from the lower light emitting device 128.

[First Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the slot machine 1 of this modified example, the display of the lower decoration device 120 can be visually recognized also on the inclined base part 14 which is the upper surface of the step part protruding forward from the front frame 2 formed below the symbol display window 5.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the lower decoration device 120 of the present modification is formed with an upper window 151 having a transparent member fitted on the upper surface. In addition, an upper opening 141 into which a transparent member is fitted is formed in the inclined pedestal portion 14 so as to correspond to the position of the upper window portion 151, and a decorative member positioned above through the upper window portion 151 and the upper opening 141. 130 is visible. A decorative pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern facing the front window 122 is drawn at a position facing the upper window 151 in the decorative member 130. The upper rotating shaft 125 is made of a transparent material, and an upper light emitting device 152 capable of emitting light upward is provided inside the upper rotating shaft 125.

  The upper light-emitting device 152 can irradiate the decoration member 130 with either red light or blue light in conjunction with the lower light-emitting device 128, and the portion of the decoration member 130 that faces the upper window 151 is also a front window. Similar to the portion facing the portion 122, the decorative pattern that can be visually recognized is different between the case where red light is transmitted and the case where blue light is transmitted on the same surface, and the decoration facing the front window portion 122 is different. The decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern is made visible. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 88, the decorative pattern on which the characters “in performance” are drawn is visible in both the front window portion 122 and the upper window portion 151. Thereby, the decorative design corresponding to the decorative design displayed in the lower part can be displayed in the inclined base part 14 which is easy to see for the player, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  From the above, the projecting portion projecting forward is provided below the variable display portion (reel 6), and the projecting portion is provided with the lower decorative device 120. The lower decorating device 120 has a front surface facing forward in the projecting portion ( The decorative pattern is made visible on the front window 122) and the upper surface (upper window 151) facing upward. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed on the front surface and the upper surface is the same or related pattern.

  Although the decorative pattern is displayed on the inclined platform 14, the present invention is not limited to this position, and any display may be used as long as the decorative pattern is displayed between the reel 6 and the front opening 140. In addition, the decorative pattern that can be viewed from the front opening 140 and the decorative pattern that can be viewed from the upper opening 141 may be the same pattern, related patterns, or different patterns. . Further, the decorative member for displaying the decorative pattern in the front opening 140 and the decorative member for displaying the decorative pattern in the upper opening 141 are separate members so that the decorative pattern can be independently changed. And you may make it alert | report the information regarding a game.

[Second Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 according to this modification can be provided with more decorative patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in this modification, the decorative member 130 is formed in a long band shape, and is wound around the upper rotating shaft 125 and the lower rotating shaft 126. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the state is changed from a state in which the whole is wound around the lower rotating shaft 126 to a state in which the whole is turned up by the upper rotating shaft 125 as shown in FIG. 89 (b). It is possible to change more decorative patterns. Also, as shown in FIG. 90, if the guide roller 153 is provided so that the decorative member 130 is provided, the decorative member 130 desired for the front window 122 can always be kept vertical.

[Third Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification can change the decorative pattern as time passes.

  The slot machine of this modification is provided with a real time clock (RTC) for managing the date and time, and the decorative pattern can be changed based on the information of the real time clock. For example, as shown in FIG. 91, the decorative pattern can be changed as time passes since the slot machine was installed in the game shop. First, the decorative pattern of pattern 1 is displayed when installed in the amusement store. After that, when one week has passed since the installation in the game shop, the pattern is changed to the decorative pattern of pattern 2, and when two weeks have passed since the installation in the game shop, the pattern is changed to the decorative picture of pattern 3.

  In addition, as a decorative pattern for each pattern, only a plurality of decorative patterns with model names drawn are prepared and may be changed, or a plurality of decorative patterns corresponding to characters are prepared and these are prepared. You may make it change also about. Thus, by changing the decorative pattern with the passage of the date and time, a gaming machine with a different taste with the passage of the date and time can be obtained. In particular, if a game machine is installed in an amusement store and then changed after a certain period of time, it will have the same effect as introducing a new machine with the same model and different decorations (a new machine with a different version of the same model) Can be obtained at low cost.

[RTC processing]
In the effect control device 70, in order to change the decorative picture according to the date and time, the RTC process shown in FIG. 92 is performed in the display control process (step S224) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this RTC process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined date and time has been reached (step S811). If the predetermined date and time has been reached (step S811; Y), a process for changing to a corresponding decorative picture (step S812) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when changing the decorative pattern in units of days, for example, the RTC process is performed when the power is turned on. Of course, a change mode other than the change mode shown in FIG. 91 can be used. For example, when changing the decorative pattern in units of time, the RTC process is performed every predetermined time, The decorative pattern is changed based on the above. In addition, the RTC may manage the actual date and time, or may manage the date and time since installation in the game store. Further, the time from power-on may be managed.

  From the above, the lower decoration control device (production control device 70) can change the decoration pattern that is visible to the player by operating the driving device in association with at least the passage of the date and time.

[Fourth Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 4th modification of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification can execute a suggestion display that suggests winning of a special prize on the lower decoration device 120.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (a), when the player 160 is performing an operation relating to a game, the lower decoration device 120 displays a decorative pattern according to the game effect, and the model name is drawn here. The displayed decorative picture is displayed. Then, in a state where the special prize is won but the special prize is not established, that is, the flag is carried over, for example, the player 160 leaves the seat, and the operation related to the game is not performed for a predetermined time. When the state is reached, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), a suggestion display (in this case, a display of “BIG?”) That suggests the winning of the special prize is performed in the lower decoration device 120.

[Suggestion display processing]
In the effect control device 70, as the process related to the suggestion display, the suggestion display process shown in FIG. 94 is performed in the display control process (step S224) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this suggestion display process, first, it is determined whether there is no operation for a predetermined time (step S821). The operation here is an operation related to a game, for example, an operation of the max bet button 17, the start lever 21, and the reel stop button 24. It may also include the insertion of medals and the operation of other buttons.

  If it is not in the state of no operation for a predetermined time (step S821; N), the process proceeds to step S825. If there is no operation for a predetermined time (step S821; Y), it is determined whether there is a special winning flag (step S822). If there is a special winning flag (step S822; Y), a suggestion display is executed at a first ratio (eg, 2%) (step S823), and the process proceeds to step S825. If there is no special prize winning flag (step S822; N), a suggestion display is executed at the second ratio (for example, 1%) (step S824), and the process proceeds to step S825. Here, the first ratio is higher than the second ratio. In other words, the suggestion display is performed at a higher rate when there is a special winning flag.

  When execution of suggestion display is determined in steps S823 and S824, the lower decoration apparatus 120 is operated to perform suggestion display as shown in FIG. 93 (b). Various indications such as a display that suggests regardless of the type of the special prize such as “Win?” Or a display that also suggests the type of the special prize such as “BIG?” Are possible.

  In step S825, it is determined whether the suggestion display is being executed. If the suggestion display is not being executed (step S825; N), the suggestion display process ends. Further, when the suggestion display is being executed (step S825; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an operation related to the game (step S826). If there is no operation related to the game (step S826; N), the suggestion display process is terminated. Moreover, when there exists operation regarding a game (step S826; Y), a suggestion display is complete | finished (step S827) and a suggestion display process is complete | finished.

  In addition, although it was set as the case where there was no operation regarding a game for a predetermined time as start conditions of suggestion display, it is not restricted to this. For example, a suggestion display may be performed at a predetermined rate only on the condition that a special prize is won, or a sensor for detecting the presence of the player 160 is provided, and the suggestion display is performed when there is no player 160. You may do it. Further, although the suggestion display end condition is that an operation related to a game is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be that a predetermined time elapses or a special prize is established.

[Fifth Modification of Second Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 5th modification of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of this modification can change the decorative pattern displayed on the lower decorative device 120 in accordance with the player's operation.

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of operation units that can be operated by the player. The operation unit includes a max bet button 17, a start lever 21, and a reel that form a game operation unit for performing operations related to the variable display game. There are the stop button 24 and the effect button 10 that forms an effect operation unit for performing operations related to game effects. In the slot machine of this modification, the effect control device 70 performs a process of changing the decoration pattern displayed on the lower decoration device 120 based on the operation of the effect button 10 that forms the effect operation unit for performing an operation related to the game effect. It is like that.

  The operation of changing the decorative pattern is effective in a state where the game is not being executed, for example, in a waiting state for a customer. The decoration pattern may be selected by operating the lower decoration device 120 each time the effect button 10 is operated, and changing to a different decoration pattern, or displaying a decoration pattern selection screen on the image display device 3. Then, an ornamental pattern may be selected on the selection screen by operating the effect button 10, and the lower decoration device 120 may be operated according to the selection result. Thus, by making it possible to change the decorative picture according to the player's intention, it is possible to set the display according to the player's preference and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, the decorative pattern may be changed based on the operation of the game operation unit during the execution of the game. For example, the result of the internal lottery may be suggested by changing the decorative pattern based on the operation of the start lever 21. Moreover, the result of the internal lottery may be suggested by changing the decorative pattern based on the operation of the reel stop button 24. Further, the decorative pattern may be changed based on the operation of the game operation unit or the operation of the effect operation unit in which the operation on the game is invalid during the game. The game operation unit in which the operation for the game is invalid is, for example, the max bet button 17 or the reel stop button 24 corresponding to the already stopped reel 6. By doing in this way, the notification which is not in the past can be performed and the interest of a game can be improved.

  As described above, the player has an operation unit that can be operated, and the operation unit has a game operation unit (the max bet button 17, the start lever 21, and the reel stop button 24) for performing an operation related to the variable display game, and the game. And an effect operation unit (production effect button 10) for performing operations related to the production, and the lower decoration control device (production control device 70) operates the drive device based on the operation of the production operation unit and is visually recognized by the player. The decorative pattern that can be changed can be changed.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described slot machine of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted. The part will be described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image display device 3 can operate.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the image display device 3 according to the present embodiment has an initial position (first position) above the reel 6 that forms the variable display section and does not overlap with the variable display section. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), it is possible to move between an effect position (second position) overlapping the front of the variable display section.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), a rotating lamp 170 serving as a gaming device is provided at a position behind the image display device 3 with the image display device 3 in the initial position. As shown in FIG. 95A, the rotating lamp 170 is covered with the image display device 3 and cannot be visually recognized by the player when the image display device 3 is in the initial position. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the image display device 3 is in a visible state by moving to the effect position, and operates (emits light and rotates) in such a visible state.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (c), the image display device 3 and the rotating lamp 170 are provided on the housing 1a side. The image display device 3 is attached to the housing 1a via an arm 172, and one end of the arm 172 is attached to the housing 1a via a shaft 173 along the left-right direction so as to be rotatable. The other end is rotatably attached to the inner side of both side walls of the image display device 3 via a shaft 174 extending in the left-right direction. The arm 172 can be operated by a drive mechanism (not shown), and the effect control device 70 can move the image display device 3 by controlling the drive mechanism and can hold the image display device 3 at the initial position or the effect position. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the front frame 2 has a through-hole 175 corresponding to the initial position of the image display device 3, and the image display device 3 passes through this through-hole 175 and the front frame 2. It is supposed to be exposed in front of the. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), slits 176 through which the arm 172 can pass when the image display device 3 moves to the effect position are formed on both sides of the symbol display window 5 in the front frame 2. 95 (b) and (d), the image display device 3 can be moved to an effect position that covers the front of the symbol display window 5.

  A rotating lamp 170 constituting a gaming device is disposed in a recessed chamber 177 that is formed above the reel 6 inside the housing 1a and is recessed rearward. The concave chamber 177 is formed at the center of the rear wall portion 178 provided so as to close the through-hole 175 formed in the front frame 2 from the rear, and when the image display device 3 is in the initial position, the image display is performed. It is covered with the device 3 and is invisible to the player.

  As the image display device 3 moves in this way, it is possible to produce a novel and powerful effect that has not been possible in the past, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the gaming apparatus can be seen along with the moving operation of the image display apparatus 3, a higher effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the moving operation of the image display device 3 as described above is performed in a freeze effect that is an effect of invalidating the operation of the reel stop button 24 or the like for a predetermined time. Thus, by performing the moving operation of the image display device 3 during the freeze effect, even if the image display device 3 covers the reel 6, it is possible to prevent the game from being affected without interfering with the stop operation.

[Normal freeze production processing]
The effect control device 70 performs the process shown in FIG. 96 in the normal freeze effect process (step S245) in the freeze effect process shown in FIG. In this normal freeze effect process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined freeze effect is present (step S831). The predetermined freeze effect is a freeze effect that accompanies the moving operation of the image display device 3. If it is not the predetermined freeze effect (step S831; N), the corresponding freeze effect is executed (step S838), the reception of the freeze end command is waited (step S839), and the normal freeze effect process is terminated.

  If it is a predetermined freeze effect (step S831; Y), the operation waits until the operation timing for moving the image display device 3 to the effect position (step S832), and the operation timing of the image display device 3 is reached (step S832; Y) moves the image display device 3 to the effect position (step S833), operates the gaming device (rotating lamp 170) (step S834), and waits until the return timing for returning the image display device 3 to the initial position. (Step S835).

  When the return timing of the image display device 3 is reached (step S835; Y), the image display device 3 is moved to the initial position (step S836), and the gaming device (rotating lamp 170) is stopped (step S837). After receiving the freeze end command (step S839), the normal freeze effect process is terminated.

  Note that the image display device 3 only needs to be located in the vicinity of the reel 6 that forms the variable display section, and may be located at any position on the variable display section. The operation mechanism of the image display device 3 is not limited to the above-described one, and any mechanism may be used as long as it can move the image display device 3. Although the gaming apparatus is the rotating lamp 170, the present invention is not limited to this, and any apparatus that operates according to the progress of the game may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a decorative member which does not operate | move the game apparatus.

  In addition, as long as the image display device 3 performs a moving operation, it is not limited to the slide movement as described above, and any operation mode may be used. For example, you may make it move to an effect position by rotating. Further, it is not necessary to completely cover the reel 6 when moving to the effect position. In addition, the initial position and the effect position may not be defined by the position with respect to the reel 6, but may be defined by the position with respect to the gaming device. A state where the apparatus has moved to a position where it can be visually recognized may be set as the effect position.

  In addition, the moving operation of the image display device 3 is performed during the freeze effect. For example, the wait time for waiting for the game to start from the previous game until the elapse of a predetermined time, or the operation of stopping the reel 6 from the operation of the start lever 21. The moving operation may be performed during a period until the time becomes effective, a time after the reel 6 is stopped and the payout is completed. If the image display device 3 operates so as not to hide the reel 6, the operation may be performed while the reel 6 is rotating. The operation that does not hide the reel 6 is, for example, a setting that the image display device 3 does not hide the reel 6 at the effect position, or an operation that vibrates the image display device 3 at a position that does not hide the reel 6. Is to do.

  As described above, a variable display unit (reel 6) that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner when a predetermined condition is satisfied is provided, and a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value according to a stop result of the variable display unit is performed. The gaming machine includes an effect display device (image display device 3) that is provided in the vicinity of the variable display unit and displays an effect related to the game, and an effect control means (effect control device 70) that controls the effect display device. The effect display device is configured to be movable between a position retracted from the front of the variable display unit and a position overlapping the front of the variable display unit, and the effect control means controls the moving operation of the effect display device. It will be. Here, the effect display device may be any device as long as it is located in the vicinity of the fluctuation display portion, and may be located at any position on the fluctuation display portion.

  The effect display device (image display device 3) is provided with an accessory device (rotary lamp 170) at a position behind the effect display device in a state where the effect display device (reel 6) is retracted from the front of the variable display unit (reel 6). In the state where the effect display device is in the position where the effect display device is retracted from the front of the variable display unit, the effect object display device is covered with the effect display device and cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the effect display device overlaps the front of the variable display unit. In the state where the player has moved to the position, the player can visually recognize it.

  In addition, a lottery means (game control device 50) for performing an internal lottery for each execution of the variable display game, and a plurality of symbol combination modes according to the result of the internal lottery based on the stop operation of the variable display can be derived. Stop control means (game control device 50) for performing stop control of the variable display section, and freeze state generation means capable of generating a freeze state in which the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined period based on the result of the internal lottery (Game control device 50), and the effect control means (effect control device 70) from the position where the effect display device (image display device 3) is retracted from the front of the variable display unit (reel 6) in the freeze state. Therefore, it is possible to move to a position overlapping the front of the fluctuation display section.

  In addition, in a gaming machine that includes a variable display unit (reel 6) that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value according to a stop result of the variable display unit. And an effect display device (image display device 3) for effect display relating to the game, and an effect control means (effect control device 70) for controlling the effect display device. The effect display device is controlled by the effect control means. A gaming device (rotation) that is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position, and in which the effect control means controls the operation at a position behind the effect display device in a state where the effect display device is in the first position. The game device is covered with the effect display device and cannot be visually recognized by the player when the effect display device is in the first position. Device in second position And thus made visible from the player in a mobile state.

  In addition, the gaming device is a movable device (rotating lamp 170) that can operate according to the progress of the game.

[First Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 1st modification of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification includes a cover member 180 that covers the moving operation range of the image display device 3.

  As shown in FIG. 97, a cover member 180 having at least a transparent front surface is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1. The cover member 180 covers the entire range of the operation range of the image display device 3, and the player can penetrate the image display device 3, the reel 6, and the game device (rotating lamp 170 through the cover member 180. Etc.) are visible. By providing such a cover member 180, the image display device 3 can move in an area covered by the cover member 180. It is possible to prevent the player from touching the image display device 3 and the like, and it is possible to prevent a failure due to contact with the player.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in this modified example, groove-shaped guide portions 182 that guide the shaft portions 181 protruding from the both side surfaces of the image display device 3 are formed inside the both side walls of the cover member 180. The image display device 3 can move to the initial position and the effect position by the shaft portion 181 moving along the guide portion 182. Further, the guide unit 182 is provided with a drive mechanism (not shown) that supports the shaft unit 181 and moves along the extending direction, and the effect control device 70 controls the drive mechanism to control the image display device 3. It can be moved and held at the initial position or the production position.

  From the above, at least the front surface is transparent, and the cover member 180 that covers the moving range (the entire range of the moving operation range) of the effect display device (image display device 3) is provided.

[Second Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of this modification is different in the operation mode of the image display device 3 and the rendering operation of the reel 6.

  FIG. 99 shows the operation mode of the image display device 3 and the effect operation of the reel 6 during the freeze effect. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the freezing effect is started and enters a freezing state. When a predetermined timing is reached, the image display device 3 moves to the effecting position as shown in FIG. 99 (b) and forms a gaming device. The rotating lamp 170 operates. While the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position and covers the reel 6, the reel 6 operates to form a symbol combination corresponding to the selected special prize, as shown in FIG. 99 (c). The symbol combination corresponding to the special prize that the image display device 3 returns to the initial position and is won by the player is shown.

  After showing the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize winning for a predetermined period, the reel 6 operates as shown in FIG. 99 (d), and the symbol combination is the start of the freeze effect as shown in FIG. 99 (e). Return to the state. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (f), the freeze effect is finished and the reel 6 can be stopped.

[Normal freeze processing]
The game control apparatus 50 performs the process shown in FIG. 100 in the normal freeze process (step S65) in the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. In this normal freeze processing, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined freeze effect is produced (step S841). The predetermined freeze effect is a freeze effect that accompanies the moving operation of the image display device 3. If it is not the predetermined freeze effect (step S841; N), the normal freeze effect is executed (step S848), and the process waits until the freeze timer becomes 0 (step S849).

  If it is a predetermined freeze effect (step S841; Y), it waits until the first predetermined time elapses (step S842). The first predetermined time is the time from when the freeze effect is started as shown in FIG. 99 (a) until the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position as shown in FIG. 99 (b). When the first predetermined time elapses (step S842; Y), a specific effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 70 (step S843), and the process waits until the second predetermined time elapses (step S844).

  The second predetermined time is a time required until the image display device 3 moves to the effect position as shown in FIG. 99 (b) after the operation is started. When the second predetermined time elapses (step S844; Y), the reels are changed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special prize is obtained (step S845), and the process waits until the third predetermined time elapses (step S846). ).

  The third predetermined time is a time indicating a symbol combination corresponding to the winning special prize as shown in FIG. 99 (c). When the third predetermined time has elapsed (step S846; Y), the reels 6 are changed so as to be the symbol combination at the start of the freeze effect (step S847), and the process waits until the freeze timer becomes 0 (step S849). When the freeze timer becomes 0 (step S849; Y), a freeze end command is transmitted to the effect control device (step S850), and the normal freeze processing is ended.

[Normal freeze production processing]
The effect control device 70 performs a normal freeze process shown in FIG. 101 in place of the normal freeze effect process (step S245) shown in FIG. In this normal freeze effect process, when the predetermined freeze effect is accompanied by the operation of the image display device 3 (step S831; Y), the process waits until a specific effect command is received (step S861). When received (step S861; Y), the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position (step S833), the gaming device is operated (step S834), and the process waits until the fourth predetermined time elapses (step S862). ).

  In the fourth predetermined time, after the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the operation of returning the image display device 3 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 99 (c) is started. It is time until. When the fourth predetermined time has elapsed (step S862; Y), the image display device 3 is moved to the initial position (step S836), the gaming device is stopped (step S837), and a freezing end command is received. (Step S839), the normal freeze effect process is terminated.

  Although a specific effect command is transmitted from the game control device 50 in accordance with the operation timing of the image display device 3, if the timing is managed by the game control device 50 and the effect control device 70, a specific effect command is transmitted. The same control can be performed without transmitting the production command.

[Third Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 3rd modification of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine of this modification is configured to move the image display device 3 when an error occurs.

  In the slot machine 1 according to this modification, when the predetermined error occurs, the image display device 3 is moved from the initial position as shown in FIG. 102 (a) to the effect position as shown in FIG. 102 (b). To report the occurrence of an error. Then, based on the error being eliminated, the image display device 3 is returned to the initial position as shown in FIG.

[Security monitoring processing]
In order to perform such notification, the production control device 70 performs a security monitoring process shown in FIG. 103 instead of the security monitoring process shown in FIG. In this security monitoring process, after performing the process from step S621 to S625, it is determined whether a predetermined error command has been received (step S871).

  The predetermined error command here is a medal insertion error command transmitted when the input from the medal insertion detection switch 51 is an input indicating an abnormality, and abnormal radio wave irradiation based on the input from the radio wave detection switch 81 An abnormal radio wave command transmitted when the medals are detected, a medal full error command transmitted when the medals in the hopper of the medal payout device 63 are full, and a medal payout abnormality based on an input from the payout medal detection switch 59 This is a payout switch error command that is transmitted when the command is detected. When this predetermined error command is received (step S871; Y), the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position (step S872), the game device is operated (step S873), and an error is notified. Thereafter, it is determined whether a corresponding error cancel command has been received (step S874).

  When the corresponding error cancel command is received (step S874; Y), the image display device 3 is moved to the initial position (step S875), the gaming device is stopped (step S876), and the security monitoring process is performed. finish. Note that error notification as shown in FIG. 102 may also be performed when a door opening command transmitted when the front frame 2 is opened is received. However, as shown in FIG. 95, it is not performed in the case of a mechanism that may cause a malfunction if the front frame 2 is opened and the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position simultaneously. Furthermore, even if the front frame 2 is opened and the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position at the same time, it can be executed in the case of a mechanism in which no malfunction occurs.

[Fourth Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 4th modification of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 according to the present modification includes a second image display device 190 as a gaming device.

  In the present modification, the first image display device 3 that can be moved between the initial position and the effect position, and the first image display device 3 are in the initial position and overlap behind the first image display device 3. A second image display device 190 is provided as a gaming device arranged at the position. The first image display device 3 is a touch panel so that various input operations can be performed.

  For example, in the state where the variable display game is not performed as shown in FIG. 104 (a), flicking downward on the screen as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the first as shown in FIG. 104 (c). One image display device 3 moves to the effect position. As a result, the second image display device 190 becomes visible.

  Here, an example of inputting a password is shown, and a keyboard is displayed on the first image display device 3, and input is possible by touching a key. The second image display device 190 displays information related to password input. When the password is entered, various custom settings are displayed. Also in this case, the first image display device 3 is touched to display an image that accepts input, and the second image display device 190 displays information related to the input.

  After various setting operations are completed, flicking upward on the screen of the first image display device 3 as shown in FIG. 104 (d), thereby displaying the first image as shown in FIG. 104 (e). The device 3 returns to the initial position. As a result, the second image display device 190 is covered with the first image display device 3 and is not visible.

  In addition, the movement operation accompanying the effect during the game is performed, for example, during the freeze effect, the moving operation to the effect position of the first image display device 3 during the freeze effect. Thereby, both the first image display device 3 and the second image display device 190 can perform an effect display relating to the game, so that a higher effect can be obtained and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, during the game, it is possible to execute an effect such that the effect progresses based on the player touching the first image display device 3.

  From the above, the gaming device is a display device (second image display device 190) that performs an effect display relating to the game.

[Fifth Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, the slot machine of the 5th modification of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Basically, it has the same configuration as the slot machine of the third embodiment described above and the configuration of the lower decoration device 120 of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. A description will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification can produce effects in cooperation between the lower decoration device 120 and the image display device 3.

  In the slot machine 1 of this modification, for example, in a freeze effect based on winning a special prize, as shown in FIG. 105 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the freeze effect as shown in FIG. 105 (a). The image display device 3 moves to the effect position. At this time, the image display device 3 displays “V” for notifying the winning of the special prize.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), display is performed such that the display of “V” displayed on the image display device 3 moves downward, and the decorative member 130 operates downward on the lower decorative device 120. Thus, a display in which the display of “V” moves from the top to the bottom is performed. At this time, the display of the image display device 3 and the operation of the lower decoration device 120 are controlled so that the display of “V” moves from the image display device 3 to the lower decoration device 120. Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the display of “V” is completely moved to the lower decoration device 120 side, the image display device 3 returns to the initial position after a predetermined time, and the freeze effect ends.

  By setting it as such a structure, the effect by the movement operation of the image display apparatus 3 and the effect in the lower decoration apparatus 120 can be combined, and a higher effect can be acquired. Any display may be used as long as the display of the image display device 3 and the lower decoration device 120 cooperates.

[Sixth Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a slot machine of a sixth modification example of the third embodiment is described. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification is different in the arrangement and operation mode of the image display device 3.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the slot machine 1 of the present modification includes a first image display device 3 above the reel 6. The first image display device 3 is fixed and does not operate. A second image display device 200 is provided so as to be movable up and down on the sides of the reel 6 and the first image display device 3. The initial position of the second image display device 200 is a position on the side of the reel 6 as shown in FIG. 106 (a), and the effect position is the first image display device 3 as shown in FIG. 106 (b). Is the side position.

  Here, the second image display device 200 moves to the effect position when a special prize is won. In the state where the second image display device 200 is in the initial position, the winning combination display drawn in the effect position is in a state where it can be visually recognized. Then, in a state where the second image display device 200 has moved to the effect position, the notification lamp 201 that constitutes the gaming device provided at the initial position becomes visible. The notification lamp 201 has a character “WIN” drawn thereon and can emit light, and can clearly and effectively notify the winning of the special prize.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 107, the first image display device 3 and the second image display device 200 moved to the effect position which is a side position of the first image display device 3 are integrated with each other. An image can be displayed. Thereby, in addition to the effect produced by the movement of the second image display device 200 to the effect position, an effect produced by the integrated effect display by the two image display devices can be obtained, and a higher effect can be obtained. Can do.

[Display device operation processing]
In order to perform such control of the image display apparatus, the effect control apparatus 70 performs the display apparatus operation process shown in FIG. 108 in the display control process (step S224) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this display device operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined special prize flag (step S881). If there is no predetermined special prize flag (step S881; N), the display apparatus operation process is terminated. If there is a predetermined special winning flag (step S881; Y), it is determined whether it is the operation timing for moving the second image display device 200 to the effect position (step S882).

  When it is not operation timing (step S882; N), it transfers to step S885. If it is the operation timing (step S882; Y), the second image display device 200 is moved to the effect position (step S883), and the notification lamp 201 serving as the gaming device is operated (step S884). Then, it is determined whether it is a return timing for moving the second image display device 200 to the initial position (step S885).

  If it is not the return timing (step S885; N), the display device operation process is terminated. If it is the return timing (step S885; Y), the second image display device 200 is moved to the initial position (step S886), and the operation of the notification lamp 201 forming the gaming device is terminated (step S887). ), The display device operation process is terminated.

  Note that since the notification lamp 201 is provided, the operation timing of the second image display device 200 is set to the case where a special prize is won. However, depending on the notification content of the notification lamp 201, the second image display device 200 may be operated at other timings. May be moved. For example, the notification lamp 201 may notify a small winning combination (for example, a rare winning combination) in addition to a special winning combination, and the second image display device 200 may be moved when these are won. Further, the notification lamp 201 may not be provided.

  As described above, the first image display device 3 and the second image display device 200 are provided, and the second image display device 200 has a position adjacent to the variable display unit (reel 6) and the first image. It is configured to be movable to a position adjacent to the display device 3. Further, in a state where the second image display device 200 has moved to a position adjacent to the first image display device 3, the first image display device 3 and the second image display device 200 can integrally display images. It can be displayed.

[Seventh Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a slot machine according to a seventh modification of the third embodiment. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification is different in the arrangement and operation mode of the image display device 3.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the slot machine 1 of the present modification includes the first image display device 3 that is fixed above the reel 6 and does not operate, and between the reel 6 and the first image display device 3. A second image display device 210 operable in the left-right direction is provided. The second image display device 210 can move between a position above the left reel 6a as shown in FIG. 109 (a) and a position above the right reel 6c as shown in FIG. 109 (b). It has become.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 110, a protrusion 211 that protrudes forward is provided on the right side of the front frame 2, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the second image display device 210 is in the initial position. It is possible to move to above the left reel 6a as shown in FIG. 110 (b).

  In the slot machine 1 having such a configuration, as in each of the above-described modifications, in addition to the effect of moving the second image display device 210 by notifying the winning of a special prize, etc., assisting the derivation of the established small role In the assist state (AT state or ART state) to be performed, the moving operation is performed when the pressing order is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 111, there are two types of notification of the pressing order, A pattern and B pattern. As shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the A pattern, the first image display device 3 notifies the pressing order, and as shown in FIG. 111 (d), the second image display device in the B pattern. In 210, the pressing order is notified.

  The image data for setting the display contents on the first image display device 3 and the second image display device 210 is obtained by integrating the image data of the first image display device 3 and the image data of the second image display device 210. It is to be generated. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the image data in the A pattern is displayed on the second image display device 210 by setting the push order display in the upper area displayed on the first image display device 3. No display is set in the lower area. By setting such image data, the pressing order is displayed only on the first image display device 3 as shown in FIG. 111 (b).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 111C, the image data in the B pattern is not set to be displayed in the upper area displayed on the first image display device 3, and is displayed on the second image display device 210. The display of the push order is set in the lower area. By setting such image data, the push order is not displayed on the first image display device 3 as shown in FIG. 111 (d), and the push order is displayed only on the second image display device 210. Will come to be. Further, the display on the second image display device 210 is a display corresponding to the position of the second image display device 210 in the image data. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 111 (d), since the second image display device 210 is located on the right side, the lower right image of the image data shown in FIG. 111 (c) is displayed. As the image display device 210 moves, a corresponding image is displayed.

[Assist image generation processing]
In order to display the assist image as described above, in the effect control device 70, for example, in the process during the promotion / rushing AT shown in FIG. 40, the process during the extra AT shown in FIG. 42, and the process during the repair AT shown in FIG. In the process of setting the display of the operation assist image that is advantageous to the user (steps S373, S395, and S443), the assist image generation process shown in FIG. 112 is performed.

  In this assist image generation process, first, the pressing order is acquired (step S891), and the notification pattern (A or B) is selected (step S892). Then, an assist image is generated based on the pressing order and the notification pattern (step S893), and the assist image generation process is terminated. Thereby, image data as shown in FIGS. 111A and 111C is generated.

  In the process (steps S378, S400, S448) for updating the effect (G effect, AT image) being executed based on the reel stop information using the image data generated in this way, the second is performed when the pattern is a B pattern, for example. The push order is notified by performing a process of moving the image display device 210 on the reel 6 in the next push order.

  Note that the number of net increase per game may differ depending on the notification pattern. Further, the pressing order may be anything such as notification of the order by numbers, or notification by moving the second image display device 210 onto the reel 6 where the stop operation is performed. Further, the pattern A may be notified of all the pressing orders, and the pattern B may be notified of a part of the pressing order (for example, notification of two choices).

  From the above, the variable display unit (reel 6) that performs variable display using the plurality of reels 6 on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first image display device 3, and the second image display. And the second image display device 210 is movable to at least a position aligned with the reels 6 in the vertical direction.

[Eighth Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a description will be given of a slot machine according to an eighth modification of the third embodiment. Note that, basically, the slot machine has the same configuration as that of the above-described third embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The slot machine 1 of the present modification is different in the arrangement and operation mode of the image display device 3.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present modification, only the middle stage line is the enabling line that becomes an active line by a betting operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 113, even when a special winning is achieved with all “7” s appearing downward to the right, it is actually a symbol combination corresponding to the special winning in the middle line indicated by a dotted line in the figure. A special prize is established based on the combination of the symbols “Replay, 7, BAR”.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the image display device 3 can visually recognize the symbols on the effective lines (validable lines) indicated by dotted lines in the drawing even when the image display device 3 is moved to the effect position overlapping the front of the reel 6. Move to work. As a result, the active line is not concealed, so that the game can be continued without interfering with the game, and an effect of moving the image display device 3 is performed even during a normal game that is not in a freeze effect. It is possible to expand the range of production. Further, here, the effective line is a horizontal line, so that the player can easily recognize the symbol combination and control the moving operation so as not to overlap the effective line.

  In addition, you may be allowed to move so as not to hide the symbols on the active line, or move so as to completely cover the window during the freeze effect, and on the active line during games that are not in the freeze effect. The moving operation may be performed so as not to hide the symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of enableable lines and the effective lines differ depending on the number of bets, the moving operation may be performed so as not to hide the symbols on the active lines according to the number of bets.

  As described above, the variable display unit (reel 6) for performing variable display is provided by the plurality of reels 6 on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and is positioned so as to cross the front part of the plurality of reels 6. In a game machine that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value according to a combination of symbols stopped on an active line, an effect display device (image display device 3) that is provided in the vicinity of the variable display unit and displays an effect related to the game. ) And an effect control means (effect control device 70) for controlling the effect display device. The effect display device moves to a position retracted from the front of the variable display unit and a position overlapping the front of the variable display unit. The production control means controls the movement operation of the production display device, and controls the operation so that the symbols on the effective line can be visually recognized at the position overlapping the front of the variable display unit. The Rukoto. Here, the effective line is a virtual line that connects the symbols that can be visually recognized by the player among the symbols of each reel 6 for which the variable display is stopped.

  The effective line is a horizontal line. In addition, the effect display device (image display device 3) is provided above the variable display unit.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the image display device 3 may be provided below the reel 6 so as to move upward. In this case as well, the design on the effective line indicated by the dotted line is not hidden. Control to ascend to position. As shown in FIG. 116, when the effective line is a line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 6a, the middle stage of the middle reel 6b, and the middle stage of the right reel 6c, an image is displayed at a position above the middle reel 6b and the right reel 6c. You may comprise so that the apparatus 3 may be provided and the design on the effective line shown with a dotted line may not be hidden in a figure. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the image display devices 3 are provided above and below the reel 6, and each is configured to operate up to a position where the symbols on the middle stage line, which is an effective line indicated by a dotted line, are not hidden. You may do it. In addition, any operation mode may be used as long as it moves so as not to hide the symbols on the effective line.

  The gaming machine as described above includes a variable display unit (reel 6) that performs variable display using a plurality of reels 6 on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and crosses the front surface of the plurality of reels 6. An effect display device that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined game value in accordance with a combination of symbols stopped on an active line that is located on the active line, and that is provided in the vicinity of the variable display unit and displays effect related to the game (Image display device 3) and effect control means (effect control device 70) for controlling the effect display device, and the effect display device is located at the position retracted from the front of the variable display unit and in front of the variable display unit. The effect control means is configured to be able to move to the overlapping position, and the effect control means controls the moving operation of the effect display device so that the symbols on the effective line can be visually recognized at the position overlapping the front of the variable display unit. Control to.

  Here, the effective line is a virtual line that connects the symbols that can be visually recognized by the player among the symbols of each reel 6 for which the variable display is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to produce an unprecedented and powerful effect by moving the effect display device, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Also, since the active line is not hidden, the game can be continued without interfering with the game.

  The effective line is a horizontal line. Therefore, since the effective line is a horizontal line, it is easy for the player to see. Further, it is easy to control the movement operation so as not to overlap the effective line.

  In addition, the effect display device (image display device 3) is provided above the variable display unit. Therefore, it is easy to see from the player.

  Moreover, at least the front surface is transparent, and a cover member 180 that covers the movement range of the effect display device (image display device 3) is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the effect display device, and it is possible to prevent a failure due to contact with the player.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the slot machine that uses medals as shown in the above-described embodiment as the slot machine. For example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls are used. It is applicable to. The configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 slot machine (game machine)
3 Image display device (effect display device)
6 reel (variable display)
70 Production control means 180 Cover member

Claims (4)

According to a combination of symbols stopped on an effective line located across the front portion of the plurality of reels, including a variation display unit that performs variation display using a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine that performs a variable display game that gives a predetermined gaming value,
An effect display device that is provided in the vicinity of the variable display unit and displays an effect related to a game,
Production control means for controlling the production display device,
The effect display device
It is configured to be movable between a position retracted from the front of the fluctuation display section and a position overlapping the front of the fluctuation display section,
The production control means includes
Controlling the movement operation of the effect display device,
The game machine is characterized in that the operation is controlled so that the symbols on the effective line can be visually recognized at a position overlapping the front of the variable display section.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effective line is a horizontal line. The effect display device
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is provided above the change display section.   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a cover member that is transparent at least on a front surface and covers a movement range of the effect display device.